6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRE110
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2013
All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 5.3)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE110. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DANGER
• Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
• Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is
dangerous.
• Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the circuit just after switching off the power supply. It takes
approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
• Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
• Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed
in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
• Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
• Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
• Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
• Power supply
If power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power.
This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
• Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• Disposal
When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
 2 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Contents
Safety Precautions
1
1. Introduction
6
2. Application Notes
8
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush
2.10 Trip Signal Output
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits
2.12 CT Requirements
2.13 Autoreclose
3. Technical Description
8
16
23
34
36
38
40
43
46
49
51
53
55
62
3.1 Hardware Description
3.2 Input and Output Signals
3.3 Automatic Supervision
3.4 Recording Function
3.5 Metering Function
3.6 Control Function
4. User Interface
62
64
69
75
78
78
79
4.1 Outline of User Interface
4.2 Operation of the User Interface
4.3 Personal Computer Interface
4.4 MODBUS Interface
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication
4.7 Clock Function
4.8 Special Mode
5. Installation
79
82
150
150
150
150
151
152
153
5.1 Receipt of Relays
5.2 Relay Mounting
153
153
 3 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge
5.4 Handling Precautions
5.5 External Connections
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE110, S3-GRE110
157
157
157
157
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
158
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
6.2 Cautions
6.3 Preparations
6.4 Hardware Tests
6.5 Function Test
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.7 Maintenance
158
158
159
160
162
172
174
7. Putting Relay into Service
177
Appendix A
178
Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-149
178
Appendix B
184
Signal List
184
Appendix C
192
Event Record Items
192
Appendix D
197
Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix E
197
200
Relay Menu Tree
200
Appendix F
211
Case Outline
211
Appendix G
214
Typical External Connection
Appendix H
214
224
Relay Setting Sheet
224
Appendix I
242
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
Appendix J
242
246
Return Repair Form
246
Appendix K
251
Technical Data
251
 4 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix L
257
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
Appendix M
257
260
Modbus: Interoperability
260
Appendix N
290
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
Appendix O
290
297
PLC Default setting
297
Appendix P
299
Inverse Time Characteristics
Appendix Q
299
305
IEC61850: Interoperability
305
Appendix R
347
Ordering
347
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.5.3)
 5 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. Introduction
GRE110 series relays provide non-directional overcurrent protection for radial distribution
Medium Voltage class networks, and back-up protection for distribution networks.
Note: GRE110 series relays are non-directional, and are applicable to systems where fault current
flows in a fixed direction, or flows in both directions but there is a significant difference in
magnitude. In systems where a fault current flows in both directions and there is not a significant
difference in the magnitude of the fault current, the directional overcurrent protection provided
by GRE140 facilitates fault selectivity.
The GRE110 series provides the following protection schemes in all models.
• Overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults with definite time or inverse time
characteristics
• Instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults
The GRE110 series provides the sensitive earth fault protection scheme depending on the models.
The GRE110 series provides the following functions for all models.
• Two settings groups
• Configurable binary inputs and outputs
• Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring
• Trip circuit supervision
• Autoreclosing function
• Automatic self-supervision
• Menu-based HMI system
• Configurable LED indication
• Metering and recording functions
• Front mounted USB port for local PC communications
• Rear mounted RS485 serial ports for communications
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE110 series and identifies the functions to be provided by
each member.
 6 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
Model Number
GRE110 400
401
402
420
421
422
3P + E(*) + SE
820
821
Current input
3P + E
Binary Input port
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
Binary Output port
4
4
8
4
4
8
4
4
IDMT O/C (OC1, OC2)








DT O/C (OC1 – 4)








Instantaneous O/C (OC1 – 4)








IDMT Earth Fault O/C (EF1, EF2)






DT Earth Faiult O/C (EF1 – 4)











SEF protection (SEF1 – 4)
2P + Vo + SE
Phase U/C








Thermal O/L








NPS O/C






Broken conductor protection






CBF protection








Inrush current detector








Cold load protection








Auto-reclose








Trip circuit supervision








Self supervision








CB state monitoring








Trip counter alarm








∑Iy alarm








CB operate time alarm








Fault records








Event records








Disturbance records








Modbus Communication








IEC60850-5-103 Communication








149
149
IEC 61850 communication (option)
Case width (mm)
()
149
149
223
()
149
149
223
E: current from residual circuit or CT
SE: current from core balance CT
3P: three-phase current
(*)
DT: definite time
E : current (Io) calculated from three-phase current in relay internal
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
O/C: overcurrent protection
U/C: undercurrent protection
OC∗: phase overcurrent element
O/L: overload protection
NPS: negative phase sequence
EF∗: earth fault element SEF: sensitive earth fault
CBF: circuit breaker failure
Model 400 provides three phase and earth fault overcurrent protection.
Model 420 provides three phase, earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection.
 7 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2. Application Notes
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
GRE110 provides protection for radial distribution networks with phase fault and earth fault
overcurrent elements OC1 to OC4 and EF1 to EF4*. The protection of local and downstream
terminals is coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.
*at model 400, 401 and 402, the earth fault current input may be connected either in the residual
circuit of the phase CTs, or alternatively a dedicated earth fault CT may be used. In the case of
connection in the residual circuit of the phase CTs, the settings of the phase CT ratio OCCT and the
earth fault CT ratio EFCT should be equal. On the other hand, where a dedicated earth fault CT is
applied, then the settings of OCCT and EFCT should NOT be equal, and in this case the measuring
range of earth fault current is limited to 20A maximum (see section 2.2.5).
** On GRE110-820 and 821 models, current inputs are A phase and C phase only. The B phase
element is currucurate from A phase and C phase current for metering function. But B phase
cullcurated current is not for protection and recording function. So the B phase current is not
operate at the some scheme logic.
2.1.1
Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without being
substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides reasonably fast
tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults can occur.
Where ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power source) is small compared with that of
the protected section ZL, there is an appreciable difference between the current for a fault at the far
end of the section (ES/(ZS+ZL), ES: source voltage), and the current for a fault at the near end
(ES/ZS). When operating time is inversely proportional to the current, the relay operates faster for
a fault at the end of the section nearer the power source, and the operating time ratio for a fault at
the near end to the far end is ZS/(ZS + ZL).
The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1.1 for radial networks with
several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the downstream
section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.
Operate time
TC
A
B
TC
C
Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection
The OC1 and EF1 elements for stage-1 have IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1) in
accordance with IEC 60255-151:
 8 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

 
k

 + c
t = TMS × 
α
 

 I
− 1 
 
 Is
( )
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.2.
In addition to the above nine curve types, OC1 and EF1 can provide user configurable IDMT
curves. If required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, α
and c. The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants. OC2 and EF2
for stage-2 also provide the same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
IEC/UK Inverse Curves
(Time Multiplier = 1)
IEEE/US Inverse Curves
(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000
100
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
100
10
LTI
NI
1
10
1
MI
VI
VI
CO2
CO8
EI
EI
0.1
0.1
1
10
100
1
10
100
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics
Programmable Reset Characteristics
OC1 and EF1 have a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time delayed, or
dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
 9 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an
upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional
delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the element returns
to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset
The dependent time resetting characteristic is applied only to the IEEE/US operate characteristics,
and is defined by the following equation:




kr

t = RTMS × 
β 



1 −  I I  
S 



(2)
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
k, β, c = constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.
The dependent time reset characteristic also can provide user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants kr and β. Table
2.1.1 shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
 10 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Description
IEC ref.
k
α
c
kr
β
IEC Normal Inverse
A
0.14
0.02
0
-
-
IEC Very Inverse
B
13.5
1
0
-
-
IEC Extremely Inverse
C
80
2
0
-
-
UK Long Time Inverse
-
120
1
0
-
-
IEEE Moderately Inverse
D
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
2
IEEE Very Inverse
E
19.61
2
0.491
21.6
2
IEEE Extremely Inverse
F
28.2
2
0.1217
29.1
2
US CO8 Inverse
-
5.95
2
0.18
5.95
2
US CO2 Short Time Inverse
-
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
2.261
2
User configurable curve
-
0.00 –
300.00
0.00 –
5.00
0.000 –
5.000
0.00 –
300.00
0.00 –
5.00
Note: kr and β are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
IEEE Reset Curves
(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000.00
Time (s)
100.00
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1
1
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics
2.1.2
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the
 11 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is
applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring elements
OC1 and EF1 and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective protection
with graded setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination with the
downstream section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2.1.4 As is clear in the figure, the nearer
to the power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section. This is
undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.
Operate time
TC
TC
A
B
C
Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.3
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the phase fault and earth fault overcurrent
protection with selective definite time or inverse time characteristic.
The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to “D”. Definite time
overcurrent elements OC1-D and EF1-D are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection
respectively, and trip signal OC1 TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given through the delayed pick-up timer
TOC1 and TEF1.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE” or
“US” according to the IDMT characteristic to employ. Inverse time overcurrent elements OC1-I
and EF1-I are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection respectively, and trip signal OC1
TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation etc. , and can block the OC1-D element by the scheme switch [OC1-2F]
respectively. See Section 2.9.
The signals OC1 HS and EF1 HS are used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar
protection (refer to Section 2.12).
These protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] and [EF1EN] or binary input
signals OC1 BLOCK and EF1 BLOCK.
OC2 and EF2 are provided with the same logic of OC1 and EF1.
 12 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A
t
&
OC1
B
-D
C
TOC1
0
104
51
≥1
[MOC1]
+
52
"D"
≥1
"IEC"
≥1
53
≥1
OC1-A
A
OC1
B
HS
C
"C"
OC1 B
-I
C
&
88
89
90
OC1-A HS
OC1-B HS
OC1-C HS
&
[OC1EN
+
OC1 TRIP
OC1-C
"US"
&
101
OC1-B
"IEEE"
A
OC1-C TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[OC1-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
OC1-B TRIP
≥1
0
t
&
OC1-A TRIP
103
0
t
&
102
≥1
&
"ON"
OC1 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.1.5 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection OC1
TEF1
EF1-D
0
t
&
117
≥1
EF1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF1-2F]
+
“Block” &
ICD
63
≥1
EF1
[MEF1]
+
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF1-I
&
[EF1EN]
+
&
"ON"
EF1 BLOCK
EF1HS
1
Figure 2.1.6 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection EF1
 13 
91
EF1 HS
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.1.4
Settings
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase and residual overcurrent protection
and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OCCT
1 - 20000
1
400
CT ratio for 3-phase current
EFCT
1 - 20000
1
200
CT ratio for earth-fault curret
OC1
0.10 – 25.00 A
0.01 A
1.00 A
OC1 threshold setting
TOC1
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MOC1] =
IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC1 definite time setting. Required if [MOC1] =
DT.
TOC1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MOC1] = IEC or if [OC1R] = DEF.
TOC1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [OC1R] = DEP.
EF1
0.05 – 25.00 A
0.01 A
0.30 A
EF1 threshold setting
TEF1
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MEF1] =
IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1] =DT.
TEF1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MEF1] = IEC or if [EF1R] = DEF.
TEF1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [EF1R] = DEP.
[OC1EN]
Off / On
On
OC1 Enable
[MOC1]
D / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
OC1 characteristic
OC1 inverse curve type.
Required if [MOC1] = IEC.
Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC1] = US.
[MOC1C]
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
[OC1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
OC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC1] =
IEEE or US.
[OC1-2F]
NA / Block
NA
OC1 2f block Enable
[EF1EN]
Off / On
On
EF1 Enable
[MEF1]
D / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
EF1 characteristic
[MEF1C]
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
EF1 inverse curve type.
Required if [MEF1] = IEC.
Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF1] = US.
[EF1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1] =
IEEE or US.
[EF1-2F]
NA / Block
NA
EF1 2f block Enable
 14 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent protection
Current setting
In Figure 2.1.7, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault
on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the next
section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. The setting is normally 1 to 1.5 times or less
of the minimum fault current.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate
on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current
transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.
A
B
F1
C
F2
F3
Figure 2.1.7 Current Settings in Radial Feeder
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to the relays on adjacent feeders.
Consider a minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a
maximum. In Figure 2.1.7, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A
may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may
sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time
coordination must also be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for the
small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a fault
at point F2 in Figure 2.1.7.
Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm
where,
T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2: relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin
 15 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent protection
Current setting
The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote
end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault at
the remote end of the next feeder section.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate
on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current
transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the selection of
instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to operate for large
motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.
Time setting
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way as
explained in “Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection”.
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, definite time overcurrent elements OC2 to
OC4 and EF2 to EF4 provide instantaneous overcurrent protection. OC2 and EF2 also provide the
same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each
element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. The phase fault
elements operate on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
When they are applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of the
protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power
source), and the magnitude of the fault current in the local end fault is much greater (3 times or
more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS≧3, for example) than that in the remote end fault under the condition that
ZS is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the operating zone of the
elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous and selective protection
can be applied.
This high setting overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near the
power source where the setting is feasible, but the longest tripping times would otherwise have to be
accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.2.1 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases as
ZS increases.
 16 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operate time
TC
A
B
TC
C
Figure 2.2.1 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC2 to OC4 is obtained
in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF2 to EF4 is obtained
in the event of single phase earth faults.
2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.2.2,
well coordinated protection with the fuses in branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for the
feeder faults can be provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with
time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.
Fuse
GRE110
Figure 2.2.2 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses
Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or
EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.2.3, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
 17 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Time (s)
OC1
OC2
OC3
Fuse
Current (amps)
Figure 2.2.3 Staged Definite Time Protection
2.2.3
Scheme Logic
As shown in Figure 2.2.4 to Figure 2.2.9, OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 have independent scheme
logics. OC2 and EF2 provide the same logic of OC1 and EF1. OC3 and EF3 give trip signals OC3
TRIP and EF3 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TEF3. OC4 and EF4 are used to
output alarm signals OC4 ALARM and EF4 ALARM. Each trip and alarm can be blocked by
incorporated scheme switches [OC2EN] to [EF4EN] and binary input signals OC2 BLOCK to EF4
BLOCK. OC*-D and EF*-D elements can be also blocked by the scheme switches [OC*-2F] and
[EF*-2F]. See Section 2.9.
A
&
OC2
B
-D
C
&
&
t
TOC2
0
t
0
t
0
106
≥1
107
≥1
108
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[OC2-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
54
≥1
[MOC2]
+
55
"D"
≥1
"IEC"
≥1
56
OC2-A
OC2-B
OC2-C
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
A
&
OC2 B
-I
C
&
&
[OC2EN
+
&
"ON"
OC2 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.2.4
Phase Overcurrent Protection OC2
 18 
≥1
OC2-A TRIP
OC2-B TRIP
OC2-C TRIP
105
OC2 TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TOC3
57
A
&
t
0
110
&
t
0
111
&
t
0
112
58
OC3 B
59
C
OC3-A TRIP
OC3-B TRIP
OC3-C TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[OC3-2F]
≥1
+ “Block”
&
ICD
109
OC3 TRIP
[OC3EN]
+
&
"ON"
1
OC3 BLOCK
Figure 2.2.5
Phase Overcurrent Protection OC3
TOC4
60
A
&
t
0
114
OC4-A
ALARM
&
t
0
115
OC4-B
ALARM
&
t
0
116
OC4-C
ALARM
61
OC4 B
62
C
0.00 - 300.00s
[OC4-2F]
≥1
+ “Block”
&
ICD
113
OC4
ALARM
[OC4EN]
+
&
"ON"
OC4 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.2.6
Phase Overcurrent Protection OC4
TEF2
EF2-D
0
t
&
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF2-2F]
+
“Block” &
ICD
64
≥1
EF1
[MEF2]
+
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF2-I
&
[EF2EN]
+
&
"ON"
EF2 BLOCK
118
≥1
1
Figure 2.2.7
Earth fault Protection EF2
 19 
EF2 TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TEF3
65
EF3
0
t
&
119
EF3 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF3-2F]
+
“Block” &
ICD
[EF3EN]
+
&
"ON"
EF3 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.2.8
Earth fault Protection EF3
TEF4
66
EF4
t
&
0
120
EF4 ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF4-2F]
+
“Block” &
ICD
[EF4EN]
+
&
"ON"
EF4 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.2.9
Earth fault Protection EF4
2.2.4 Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the instantaneous and definite time overcurrent
protection and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OC2
0.10 – 25.00 A
0.01 A
5.00 A
OC2 threshold setting
TOC2
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
OC2 definite time setting.
TOC2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC or if [OC2R] = DEF.
TOC2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP.
OC3
0.10 – 150.0 A
0.01 A
10.00 A
OC3 threshold setting
TOC3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
OC3 definite time setting.
OC4
0.10 – 150.0 A
0.01 A
10.00 A
OC4 threshold setting
TOC4
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
OC4definite time setting.
EF2
0.05 – 25.00 A
0.01 A
3.00 A
EF2 threshold setting
 20 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TEF2
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
EF2 definite time setting.
TEF2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC or if [EF2R] = DEF.
TEF2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP.
EF3
0.05 – 100.00 A
0.01 A
5.00 A
EF3 threshold setting
TEF3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
EF3 definite time setting.
EF4
0.05 – 100.00 A
0.01 A
5.00 A
EF4 threshold setting
TEF4
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
EF4 definite time setting.
[OC2EN]
Off / On
Off
OC2 Enable
[MOC2]
D / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
OC2 characteristic
OC2 inverse curve type.
Required if [MOC2] = IEC.
Required if [MOC2] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC2] = US.
[MOC2C]
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
[OC2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
OC2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MOC2] = IEEE or US.
[OC2-2F]
NA / Block
NA
OC2 2f block Enable
[OC3EN]
Off / On
Off
OC3 Enable
[OC3-2F]
NA / Block
NA
OC3 2f block Enable
[OC4EN]
Off / On
Off
OC4 Enable
[OC4-2F]
NA / Block
NA
OC4 2f block Enable
[EF2EN]
Off / On
Off
EF2 Enable
[MEF2]
D / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
EF2 characteristic
[MEF2C]
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
EF2 inverse curve type.
Required if [MEF2] = IEC.
Required if [MEF2] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF2] = US.
[EF2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
OC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2]
= IEEE or US.
[EF2-2F]
NA / Block
NA
EF2 2f block Enable
[EF3EN]
Off / On
Off
EF3 Enable
[EF3-2F]
NA / Block
NA
EF3 2f block Enable
[EF4EN]
Off / On
Off
EF4 Enable
[EF4-2F]
NA / Block
NA
EF4 2f block Enable
 21 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection
On the models 400, 401 and 402, the earth fault current input may be connected either in the
residual circuit of the phase CTs, or alternatively a dedicated earth fault CT may be used. In the
case of connection in the residual circuit of the phase CTs, the settings of the phase CT ratio OCCT
and the earth fault CT ratio EFCT should be equal. On the other hand, where a dedicated earth fault
CT or only earth fault CT (no 3 phase CT) are applied, then the settings of OCCT and EFCT may
NOT be equal. The connection methods are illustrated in figure 2.2.10.
The maximum setting value of the earth fault protection is 20.00A in case of elements EF1 and
EF2, and 100.00A for EF3 and EF4. However, it should be noted that, in the case that a dedicated
earth fault CT connection is used, the measuring range of earth fault current is limited to 20A
maximum.
TB1
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ie
Residual
current
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TB1
TB1
Ia
Ia
Ib
Ib
Ic
Ic
Ie
Ie
from
Zero-phase
current
transformer
(a)for Residual current
detection wiring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ie
Ie
from
Zero-phase
current
transformer
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ie
(b)for Zero-phase current (c)for only Zero-phase
current transformer wiring
transformer wiring
Figure 2.2.10
Earth fault current detection wiring
2.2.6 CT Wiring of 2 phase CT
When applying 2 phase CT’s for the main circuit, the relay input wiring is as shown in Figure
2.2.11. This wiring derives phase B vector current from phase A and phase C vector current as
shown in Figure 2.2.12. If zero phase current occur or 3 phase current is unbalanced, the phase B
current measurement value will not be correct.
When applying 2 phase CT’s, the earth fault current input cannot be connected to the residual
circuit of the phase CT’s. This wiring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
TB1
Ia
Ic
Ie
from
Zero-phase
current
transformer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 2.2.11 2 phase CT wiring
Ia
Ia
Ia+Ic
Ib
Ic
Ie
Ic
Ib=-(Ia+Ic)
Figure 2.2.12 Phase B composition of vectors
 22 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high
impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected in earth faults. Furthermore, the
SEF elements of GRE110 are also applicable to the “standby earth fault protection” and the “high
impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers”.
The SEF elements provide more sensitive setting ranges (1 mA to 250mA) than the regular earth
fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of mal-operation due to
harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore the SEF
elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Models 420, 421, 422, 820 and 821 which have a dedicated earth
fault input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage earth fault protection.
Stage 2 of the two-stage earth fault protection is used only for the standby earth fault protection.
SEF2 provides inverse time or definite time selective earth fault protection. SEF3 and SEF4
provide definite time earth fault protection.
When SEF employs IEEE, US or C (Configurable) inverse time characteristics, two reset modes
are available: definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is
employed, definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current during
normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection
The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection, and
ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with a
time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers and
feeder transformers.
Restricted earth fault protection
The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.3.1, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
 23 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.
F
Power
Transformer
Varistor
Stabilising
Resistor
GRE110
SEF input
Figure 2.3.1 High Impedance REF
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 to Figure 2.3.5 show the scheme logic of inverse time or definite time selective earth
fault protection and definite time earth fault protection on model 420, 421 and -422.
In Figures 2.3.2 and 2.3.3, the definite time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2] to
“D”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and stage 1 trip signal
SEF1-S1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The element SEF2 is enabled and
trip signal SEF2 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE2.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”,
“US” or “C” according to the inverse time characteristic to employ. The element SEF1 is enabled
and stage 1 trip signal SEF1-S1 TRIP is given. The element SEF2 is enabled and trip signal SEF2
TRIP is given.
The SEF1 protection provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE1
S2.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1-D or SEF1-I continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the
stage 2 trip signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
The signal SEF1 HS is used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar protection
(refer to Section 2.9)
SEF protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1EN] and [SE2EN] or binary input signal
SEF1 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK. Stage 2 trip of standby earth fault protection can be disabled by
the scheme switch [SE1S2].
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF*-D element by sheme switch [SE*-2F]. See
Section 2.9
In Figures 2.3.4 and 2.3.5, SEF3 and SEF4 protections are programmable for instantaneous or
definite time delayed operations with setting of delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 and give
trip signals SEF3 TRIP and SEF4 ALARM.
 24 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TSE1
SEF1-D
0
t
&
121
SEF1 TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
SE1-2F]
67
+ “Block”
&
ICD
SEF1
≥1
TS1S2
[MSE1]
+
[SE1S2]
+
"D"
t
&
0
122
SEF1-S2 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"ON"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
SEF1HS
SEF1-I
92
SEF1 HS
&
[SE1EN]
+
&
"ON"
SEF1 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.3.2 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF1
TSE2
SEF2-D
0
t
&
123
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
SE2-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
+
68
≥1
[MSE2]
SEF2
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
SEF2-I
&
[SE2EN]
+
&
"ON"
SEF2 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.3.3 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF2
 25 
SEF2 TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TSE3
69
SEF3
0
t
&
124
SEF3 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE3-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[SE3EN]
+
&
"ON"
SEF3 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.3.4 Definite Time SEF Protection SEF3
TSE4
70
SEF4
t
&
0
125
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
SEF4
ALARM
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[SE4EN]
+
&
"ON"
SEF4 BLOCK
1
Figure 2.3.5 Definite Time SEF Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
SECT
1 - 20000
1
150
CT ration for sensitive earth fault current
SE1
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.001 A
0.010 A
SEF1 threshold setting
TSE1
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*1)
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] =DT.
TSE1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE1] =IEC or if [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
TS1S2
0.00 – 300.00 s (*1)
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
SE2
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.001 A
0.020 A
SEF2 threshold setting
TSE2
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*2)
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF2 definite time setting.
TSE2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE2] =IEC or if [SE2R] = DEF.
TSE2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP.
 26 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SE3
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.001 A
0.100 A
SEF3 threshold setting
TSE3
0.00 – 300.00 s (*1)
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF3 definite time setting.
SE4
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.001 A
0.250 A
SEF4 threshold setting
TSE4
0.00 – 300.00 s (*1)
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF4 definite time setting.
[SE1EN]
Off / On
On
SEF1 Enable
[MSE1]
DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C]
SEF1 inverse curve type.
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[SE2EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF2 Enable
[MSE2]
DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C
D
SEF2 characteristic
[MSE2C]
SEF2 inverse curve type.
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE2] = IEC.
Required if [MSE2] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE2] = US.
[SE2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE2] = IEEE or US.
[SE3EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF3 Enable
[SE4EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF4 Enable
(*1) Time setting of TSE1 – TSE4 should be set in consideration of the SEF drop-off time
80-100ms.
SEF
SEF is set smaller than the available earth fault current and larger than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to the unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder,
but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error
in phase faults.
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
High impedance REF protection
CT saturation under through fault conditions results in voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
 27 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Healthy CT
Saturated CT
Transformer
Circuit
Varistor
IF
ZM
≈0
M?0
RCT
VS
RS
Stabilising GRE110
Resistor
RL
Figure 2.3.4 Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition
The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF×(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to Vs. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, Rs, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
Is is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRE110 relay. However, the actual fault
setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say that the
actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the sum of the
relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current of all the
parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is normally small
enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS ≦ IP / N – 4Imag
where:
IS = setting applied to GRE110 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
More sensitive settings for Is allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
require larger values of Rs to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential circuit
can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk, developed
may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2× 2 × Vk × (I F R S − Vk )
where:
 28 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Vk = CT knee point voltage
IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CIβ
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
β = constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point voltage
Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk ≧ 2×VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
Diretctional Sensitive Earth fault protection (at model 820 and 821)
The models 820 and 821 are espetialy models for the directional sensitive earth fault protection
using earth fault current and zero phase voltage at the non- grounding system,.
Figure 2.3.5 illustrates the directional characteristic, with the forward operate zone shaded. The
reverse zone is simply a mirror image of the forward zone. The forward operate zone or reverse
operate zone is selectable by the scheme switch [SE-DIR] As shown in Figure 2.3.6, the directional
characteristic is composed of a forward directional characteristic, reverse directional characteristic
and overcurrent thresholds.
Polarising signals for directional elements are shown in Figure 2.3.7. Polarisation for directional
sensitive earth fault element SEF is derived from a residual voltage.
Figures 2.3.8 to 2.3.11 show the scheme logic for the directional sensitive earth fault protection.
The directional control characteristic can be selected to “FWD” or “REV” or “Non” by scheme
switch setting [SE∗-DIR].
At the model 820 and 821, the directional sensitive earth fault elements can be configured for
directional operation in the same way as the standard earth fault pole, by polarising against the
residual voltage. An additional restraint on operation can be provided by a Zero phase sequence
Power element ZP, for use in protection of power systems which utilise resonant (Petersen coil)
earthing methods.
 29 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Boundary of Operation
CA + 90 +87.5 ° (leading)
CA + 60
CA + 30
10 x Is
5 x Is
CA 180
-
CA
Reverse
Operate
Zone
Forward
Operate
Zone
CA - 30
CA - 60
CA: Characteristic
angle
CA - 90
Boundary of Operation
- 87.5° (lagging)
Figure 2.3.5 Directional Operate SEF Characteristic
Directional (Forward)
&
∗∗1-4
Forward
&
∗∗1-4
Reverse
Directional (Reverse)
Overcurrent (1-4 stage)
(Note) NOC provides stage 1 and 2 only.
Figure 2.3.6
Directional element
−Ve
Ie
Ve
Figure 2.3.7
Relationship Polarising signal
 30 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
≥1
[SE1-2F]
&
& 0.00 - 300.00s
[SE1EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
≥1
121
SEF1-S1
_TRIP
&
97
SEF1
INST
TS1S2
0
t
[SE1S2]
+
[MSE1]
+
TSE1
0
t
67
SEF1
&
"ON"
0.00 - 300.00s
SEF1HS
SEF1 HS
122
SEF1-S2_
TRIP
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
"D"
ZPF
ZPR
[ZPEN]
+
&
≥1
&
&
≥1
&
≥1
"ON"
"OFF"
"FWD"
[SE1 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
Figure 2.3.8 SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic for models 820 and 821
68
SEF2
≥1
[SE2-2F]
&
& 0.00 - 300.00s
[SE2EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
TSE2
0
t
≥1
123
SEF2
_TRIP
&
157
SEF2
INST
[MSE2]
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
"D"
ZPF
ZPR
[ZPEN]
+
&
≥1
&
&
≥1
&
≥1
"ON"
"OFF"
"FWD"
[SE2DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
Figure 2.3.9 SEF2 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic for models 820 and 821
 31 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TSE3
0
t
69
SEF3
&
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE3-2F]
[SE3EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF3
INST
ZPF
ZPR
&
≥1
&
&
≥1
&
≥1
124
SEF3 TRIP
&
≥1
"ON"
[ZPEN]
+
"OFF"
[SE3 DIR]
+
"FWD"
"REV"
"NON"
Figure 2.3.10 SEF3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic for models 820 and 821
&
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
[SE4EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF4
INST
ZPF
ZPR
&
≥1
&
&
≥1
&
≥1
125
SEF4_ALARM
&
≥1
"ON"
[ZPEN]
+
"OFF"
[SE4 DIR]
+
TSE4
0
t
70
SEF4
"FWD"
"REV"
"NON"
Figure 2.3.11 SEF4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic for models 820 and 821
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection for
models 820 and 821 and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
SEFCT
1 - 20000
1
150
CT ratio for SEFCT
SEθ
−95° – 95°
1°
0°
SEF characteristic angle
SEV
0.5 – 100.0
0.1 V
3.0V
SEF ZPS voltage level
SE1
0.001 – 1.000 A
0.001 A
0.005 A
SEF1 threshold setting
TSE1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] = D.
TSE1M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
 32 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TSE1S2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
SE2
0.001 – 1.000 A
0.001 A
0.010 A
SEF2 threshold setting
TSE2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF2 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE2] = D.
TSE2M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE2] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE2] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP.
SE3
0.001 – 1.000 A
0.001 A
0.100 A
SEF3 threshold setting
TSE3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF3 definite time setting.
SE4
0.001 – 1.000 A
0.001 A
0.500 A
SEF4 threshold setting
TSE4
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
SEF4 definite time setting.
ZP
0.00 – 25.00 W
0.01 W
0.00 W
Zero phase sequence power sensitivity
[SE1EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 Enable
[SE1-DIR]
FWD / REV / NON
FWD
SEF1 directional characteristic
[MSE1]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
D
SEF1 characteristic
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[VTF-SE1BLK]
Off / On
Off
VTF block enable
[SE2EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF2 Enable
[SE2-DIR]
FWD / REV /NON
FWD
SEF2 directional characteristic
[MSE2]
D/IEC/IEEE/US/C
D
SEF2 characteristic
SEF1 inverse curve type.
[MSE1C]
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
[MSE2C]
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
SEF2 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE2] = IEC.
Required if [MSE2] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE2] = US.
[SE2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE2] = IEEE or US.
[VTF-SE2BLK]
Off / On
Off
VTF block enable
[SE3EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF3 Enable
[SE3-DIR]
FWD / REV / NON
FWD
SEF3 directional characteristic
[VTF-SE3BLK]
Off / On
Off
VTF block enable
[SE4EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF4 Enable
[SE4-DIR]
FWD / REV / NON
FWD
SEF4 directional characteristic
[VTF-SE4BLK]
Off / On
Off
VTF block enable
[ZPEN]
Off / On
Off
Zero phase sequence power block enable
 33 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection
The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load,
typically motor load.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. However,
operation is blocked when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to discriminate the
loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection.
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements are
programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is threephase only.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.1 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
Two undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output trip and alarm signals UC1 TRIP and UC2
ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
Those protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or binary input
signal UC BLOCK.
TUC1
71
A
72
UC1 B
t
0
127
&
t
0
128
&
t
0
129
73
C
[UC1EN]
+
&
0.00 - 300.00s
"ON"
&
TUC2
0
t
131
&
t
0
132
&
t
0
133
74
A
75
UC2 B
76
C
[UC2EN]
+
0.00 - 300.00s
"ON"
UC BLOCK
≥1
≥1
UC1-A TRIP
UC1-B TRIP
UC1-C TRIP
126
UC1 TRIP
UC2-A ALARM
UC2-B ALARM
UC2-C ALARM
130
UC2 ALARM
1
Figure 2.4.1 Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
 34 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
UC1
0.10 – 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.40 A
UC1 threshold setting
TUC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
UC1 definite time setting
UC2
0.10 – 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.20 A
UC2 threshold setting
TUC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
UC2 definite time setting
[UC1EN]
Off / On
Off
UC1 Enable
[UC2EN]
Off / On
Off
UC2 Enable
 35 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection
The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRE110 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained overloading.
The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
θ =
−t 
I2 
τ × 100%
e
1
−



I 2AOL 
(1)
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for ‘cold’
and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case for the hot curve where prior load current Ip is zero,
catering to the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.


I2
t =τ·Ln  2 2 
 I − I AOL 
(2)
 I2 − I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P 
 I − I AOL 
(3)
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.5.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand
chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously un-loaded
system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched onto a system
 36 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no
prior load)
Thermal Curves (Hot Curve 90% prior load)
1000
1000
100
10
τ
1
100
50
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)
100
10
1
τ
0.1
50
20
20
0.1
10
10
5
0.01
5
2
1
2
0.001
1
0.01
1
1
10
10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.5.1 Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.2 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM ALARM and trip signal THM TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMTEN]
respectively or binary input signal THM BLOCK.
77
A
THM
T
&
THM ALARM
&
THM TRIP
78
[THMAEN]
+
"ON"
[THMEN]
+
"ON"
THM BLOCK
1
Figure 2.5.2 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
 37 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
THM
0.50 – 10.0 A
0.01 A
1.00 A
Thermal overload setting.
(THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP
0.0 – 5.0 A
0.01 A
0.00 A
Prior load setting.
TTHM
0.5 - 500.0 min
0.1 min
10.0 min
Thermal time constant
THMA
50 – 99 %
1%
80 %
Thermal alarm setting.
(Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMEN]
Off / On
Off
Thermal OL enable
[THMAEN]
Off / On
Off
Thermal alarm enable
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element,
and is typically used when testing the element. For the majority of applications, THMIP
should be set to its default value of zero, in which case the previous load current, Ip, is
calculated internally by the thermal model, providing memory of conditions occurring
before an overload.
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions. This function is NOT for models 820 and 821.
Phase overcurrent protection is forced to be set to lower sensitivity when the load current is large
but NPS sensitivity is not affected by magnitude of the load current, except in the case of erroneous
negative sequence current due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines.
For some earth faults, only a limited amount of zero sequence current is fed while the negative
sequence current is comparatively larger. This is probable when the fault occurs at the remote end
with a small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the
remote end.
In these cases, NSP backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NPS
also protects the rotor of a rotating machine from over-heating by detecting a load unbalance.
Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the
negative sequence current and in machine over-heating.
Two independent negative sequence overcurrent elements are provided for tripping and alarming.
The elements are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.6.1 shows the scheme logic of the NSP. Two negative sequence overcurrent elements
NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signal NPS1 TRIP and alarm signal
NPS2 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
 38 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
transformer energisation, and can block the NPS1 and NPS2 elements by the scheme switches
[NPS1-2F] and [NPS2-2F] respectively. See section 2.9.
NPS1
TNPS1
0
t
79
&
136
NPS1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NPS1-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[NPS1EN]
+
"ON"
TNPS2
0
t
80
NPS2
&
137
NPS2 ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[NPS2-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[NPS2EN]
+
"ON"
NPS BLOCK
1
Figure 2.6.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Scheme Logic
The tripping and alarming can be disabled by scheme switches [NPS1], [NPS2] or binary input
signal NPS BLOCK.
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NSOP protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NPS1
0.10 -10.0 A
0.01 A
0.40 A
NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
NPS2
0.10 -10.0 A
0.01 A
0.20 A
NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
NPS1 definite time setting
TNPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
NPS2 definite time setting
[NPS1EN]
Off / On
Off
NPS1 Enable
[NPS2EN]
Off / On
Off
NPS2 Enable
Sensitive setting of NPS1 and NPS2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the relay
continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the maximum
value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set NPS1 and
NPS2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is around 200ms.
 39 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection
Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear. This function is NOT for models 820 and 821.
Figure 2.7.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
Single-phase series fault
E1A
E1B
1– k1
k1
I1F
k 1Z1
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
Positive phase sequence
k 2Z2
I2F
I2F
(1-k2)Z2
I0F
I0F
(1-k0)Z0
Negative phase sequence
k 0Z0
Zero phase sequence
I1F
k 2Z2
(1-k2)Z2
K0Z0
(1-k0)Z0
k 1Z1
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
I1F
Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A
E1B
Figure 2.7.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
 40 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at the fault location in a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0
(1)
Z2FI2F − Z0FI0F = 0
(2)
E1A − E1B = Z1FI1F − Z2FI2F
(3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
I1F =
Z2 + Z0
(E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
I2F =
−Z0
(E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
I0F =
−Z2
(E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
E
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given with negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
I2F |I2F|
Z0
=
=
I1F |I1F| Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of BCD element is shown in Figure 2.7.2 to obtain the stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| ≥ BCD
setting
|I1| ≥ 0.04
|I2| ≥ 0.01
0.01
0
I1
0.04
Figure 2.7.2
BCD Element Characteristic
 41 
&
BCD
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.7.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs trip
signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], binary input signal BCD BLOCK.
The broken conductor protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transforomer energisation, and can block the BCD element by scheme switch [BCD-2F]. See
Section 2.9.
81
BCD
&
TBCD
0
t
138
BCD TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[BCD-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[BCDEN]
+
"ON"
BCD BLOCK
1
Figure 2.7.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
BCD
0.10 – 1.00
0.01
0.20
I2 / I1
TBCD
0.00 – 300.00s
0.01s
0.00 s
BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN]
Off / On
Off
BCD Enable
[BCD-2F]
NA / Block
NA
BCD blocked by inrush current
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current normally
present on the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously and
displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of the last
15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage. The BCD
setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
 42 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection
When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element provided for each phase.
For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than 20ms) is
used. The element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value.
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original breaker.
To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original breaker
again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent breakers
following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping at all, or
use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip command plus
overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
The BFP is performed on per-phase basis. Figure 2.8.1 shows the scheme logic for the BFP. The
BFP is started by per-phase base trip signals EXT TRIP-A to -C or three-phase base trip signal
EXT TRIP3PH of the external line protection or an internal trip signal CBF INIT. These trip
signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation.
Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with the scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes of the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode in
which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which retrip
is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the scheme
switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is the trip
mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.8.2 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include
that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and the
BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
 43 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
[BTC]
+
A
CBF B
C
"ON"
82
TBTC
0
t
187
&
≥1
83
188
84
&
189
&
t
0
t
0
140
CBF TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
&
≥1
&
≥1
&
≥1
TRTC
0
t
≥1
t
0
t
0
0.00 - 300.00s
EXT TRIP-APH
≥1
&
EXT TRIP-BPH
≥1
&
EXT TRIP-CPH
≥1
&
[RTC]
EXT TRIP3PH
+
"OC"
CBF INIT
"DIR"
Figure 2.8.1 Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic
Fault
Start CBFP
Trip
Adjacent
breakers Closed
Open
TRIP
Normal trip
Original
breakers Closed
Retrip
Open
Tcb
Open
Tcb
OCBF
Toc
TRTC
Toc
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBTC
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.8.2 Sequence Diagram
 44 
139
CBF RETRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
CBF
0.10 – 10.0 A
0.05 A
0.50 A
Overcurrent setting
TRTC
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.50 s
Retrip time setting
TBTC
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
Back trip time setting
[RTC]
Off / DIR / OC
Off
Retrip control
[BTC]
Off / On
Off
Back trip control
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.8.2) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.8.2). The timer
setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TRTC + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
The actual tripping time after BFP start will be added the time (approx. 15 to 20ms) consumed by
motion of binary input and output to above timer’s settings. (Response time of binary inputs: less
than 8ms, Operating time of binary outputs: less than 10ms)
 45 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush
GRE110 provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising
inrush current during transformer energisation.
-
Protection block by inrush current detector
-
Cold load protection
2.9.1 Inrush Current Detector
Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
-
OC1 to OC4
EF1 to EF4
SEF1 to SEF4
NPS1 and NPS2
BCD
The blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC∗-2F], [EF∗-2F],
[SEF∗-2F], [NPS∗-2F] and [BCD-2F].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between second harmonic current I2f and fundamental current I1f
in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure 2.9.1 shows the
characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.9.2 shows the ICD block scheme. When ICD
operates, OC, EF, SEF, NPS and BCD elements are blocked independently. The scheme logic of
each element is shown in the previous sections.
I2f/I1f
|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%)
&
|I1f|≥ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0
I1f
ICDOC
Figure 2.9.1
A
ICD
B
C
ICD Element Characteristic
261
≥1
262
ICD
263
Figure 2.9.2
ICD Block Scheme
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICD-2f
10 – 50%
1%
15%
Second harmonic detection
ICDOC
1.00 – 25.0 A
0.01 A
1.00 A
ICD threshold setting
 46 
ICD
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.9.2 Cold Load Protection
The cold load function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after energising the
system. This feature is used to prevent unwanted protection operation when closing on to the type of
load which takes a high level of current for a period after energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a moment
when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5 times
normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate the
inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
This function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after closing on to the type of
load that takes a high level of load on energisation. This is achieved by a ‘Cold Load Settings
Group’, in which the user can use alternative settings of measuring elements in other setting group.
Normally the user will choose higher current settings and/or longer time delays and/or disable
elements altogether within this group. The ‘Cold Load Settings’ can be set in any of the four setting
groups provided for protection and the group is specified by the scheme switch [CLSG] setting.
2.9.2.1
Scheme Logic
A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.9.3 and Figure 2.9.4 for the
cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs, one each for CB
OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is in
STATE 0, and the normal default settings group is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE 2,
and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, the ‘Cold Load Settings Group’ is applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLSG] to “Off”.
 47 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens
CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings: Normal
Run T CLE timer
Monitor CB status
I L<ICLDO for
T CLDO time
T CLR timer
expires
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
CB status: Closed
Settings: Cold Load
CB closes
STATE 2
CB status: Open
Settings: Cold Load
Monitor CB status
Run T CLR timer
Monitor CB status
Monitor load current IL
CB opens
within
CLR time
Figure 2.9.3 State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
STATE 0
STATE 1
Change to
STATE 1
&
146
&
147
t
TCLE
0
≥1
Change to
STATE 2
≥1
Change to
STATE 0
0 - 10000s
&
STATE 2
STATE 3
148
Change to
STATE 3
&
&
149
&
t
TCLR
0
0 - 10000s
&
85
A
ICLDO B
≥1
86
TCLDO
0
t
0.00 - 100.00s
1
87
C
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.9.4 Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection
 48 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICLDO
0.10 – 10.0 A
0.01 A
0.50 A
Cold load drop-off threshold setting
TCLE
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
Cold load enable timer
TCLR
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
Cold load reset timer
TCLDO
0.00-100.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
Cold load drop-off timer
[CLSG]
Off / 1 / 2
Off
Cold load setting group
[CLDOEN]
Off / On
Off
Cold load drop-off enable
These settings are required for all setting groups and the same settings must be entered for the setting
elements above.
2.10 Trip Signal Output
As shown in Figure 2.10.1, all the trip signals are introduced into one of the seven user configurable
binary output circuits. One tripping output relay with a pair of normally open and closed contacts
is provided to trip the local circuit breaker. If the breaker failure protection is applied, the back-trip
signal CBF TRIP is introduced into another binary output circuit to trip adjacent circuit breakers,
as shown in Figure 2.10.2.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be set with the scheme switch [Reset] to “instantaneous(Ins)”, “delayed(Dl)”, “dwell(Dw)” or
“latched(Lat)”. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO.
The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it is reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input
signal REMOTE RESET. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
When instantaneous reset of the tripping output relay is selected, it must be checked that the
tripping circuit is opened with a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the trip signal output and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
[RESET]
Range
Ins / Dl / Dw / Lat
Step
Default
Ins
TBO
0.00 – 10.00s
0.01s
0.20s
 49 
Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
dwell, delayed or latched.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OC1 TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC3 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
≥1
CBF INIT
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF1-S2 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
≥1
BCD TRIP
141
CBF RETRIP
GENERAL TRIP
Binary output circuit
≥1
&
≥1
BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Ins"
&
"Dw"
+
t
0
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
&
"Lat"
Tripping output relay
S
R
F/F
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.1 Tripping Output for Local Circuit Breaker
 50 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CBF TRIP
Binary output circuit
≥1
&
≥1
BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Ins"
&
"Dw"
+
0
t
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
&
Tripping output relay
S
"Lat"
R
F/F
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.2 Tripping Output for Adjacent Circuit Breakers
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits
All GRE110 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
2.11.1
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault clearance
times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a blocked
overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly reduce fault
clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where substations
are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.11.1 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1 HS, and EF1 HS of OC1 and EF1
elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking signal. OC2 and
EF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer to Figure 2.1.5 and
2.1.6.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The signal
is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK and EF2 BLOCK at the receiving end, and blocks the
OC2 and EF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are recommended for the OC2 and
EF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time to arrive before protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the scheme switch
[MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a failure of the blocked scheme.
 51 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
F
Trip
GRE110
GRE110
GRE110
OC2 / EF2
OC2 / EF2
High
Speed
Block
OC1HS /
EF1HS
OC2 / EF2
High
Speed
Block
OC1HS /
EF1HS
Figure 2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
2.11.2
Blocked Busbar Protection
GRE110 can be applied to provide a busbar zone scheme for a simple radial system where a
substation has only one source, as illustrated in Figure 2.11.2.
For a fault on an outgoing feeder F1, the feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking signal to
inhibit operation of the incomer, the signal OC1 HS and EF1 HS being generated by the
instantaneous phase fault, and earth fault pick-up outputs of OC1 and EF1 allocated to any of the
binary output relays. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped by the OC1 and EF1 elements, programmed
with inverse time or definite time delays and set to grade with downstream protections.
The incomer protection is programmed to trip via its instantaneous elements OC2 and EF2 set with
short definite time delay settings (minimum 50ms), thus providing rapid isolation for faults in the
busbar zone F2.
At the incomer, inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the
scheme switch [MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of failure of the
blocked scheme.
GRE110 integrated circuit breaker failure protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the first trip failing to clear the earth fault.
In the case of more complex systems where the substation has two incomers, or where power can
flow into the substation from the feeders, then directional protection must be applied (refer to
GRE140 directional overcurrent protection).
 52 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GRE110
GRD110
OC1 / EF1
(inverse time)
Delayed Back-up Trip
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault
OC2 / EF2
Fast Trip
F2
Feeder Trip
Feeder Trip
Feeder Trip
GRE110
GRD110
GRD110
GRE110
GRD110
GRE110
OC2 / EF2
OC2 / EF2
OC2 / EF2
OC1 HS /
EF1 HS
OC1 HS /
EF1 HS
OC1 HS /
EF1 HS
F1
Figure 2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
2.12 CT Requirements
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection
Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.
5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy
Limit (%)
Overcurrent
Factor
Maximum Burden
(at rated current)
Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high and
accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively low, or
where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CT’s own
secondary resistance into account. GRE110 has an extremely low AC current burden, typically less
than 0.03VA for a 5A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied. Relay burden
does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10Ω. If
 53 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5Ω is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage
An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage, according
to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk ≥ If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the maximum
fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the settings to be
applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further, care should be
taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect the CTs (E.g.
residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk ≥ 2× Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
 54 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.13 Autoreclose
The GRE110 series provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme for single circuit
breaker application:
• A three phase autoreclosing scheme is used for all shots
• Autoreclosing counter
Autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4 trip signals or
external trip signals via binary inputs, as determined by scheme switches [∗∗∗∗-INIT]. Trip signals
are selected for ARC used/not used, by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] to “On” or “NA” respectively. If a trip
signal is used to block ARC, then [∗∗∗∗-INIT] is set to “BLK”. ARC can also be blocked by using
programmable binary inputs ARCBLK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is single-phase
or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots, from one to five.
In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase tripping and
reclosing.
To disable the autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
The GRE110 also provides a manual close function. A manual close can be performed via
programmable binary inputs ARCMCL.
2.13.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.13.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing can be activated by the PLC signal ARC_INIT, etc.
Auto-reclose conditions such as voltage and synchronism check VCHK, etc., can be provided by
PLC signals ARC-S∗_COND.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained using a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclosing is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to "On",
the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed, the
reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC∗-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose has been performed, but tripping occurs again. The second shot autoreclose is
performed after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, the outputs of the step
counter are: SP1 = 1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
If the three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the
 55 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
above tripping occurs. At this time, dead time counter TD3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is
performed after the period of time set on TD3 has elapsed. At this time, the outputs of the step
counter are: SP1 = 0, SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then complete, and tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault"
becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for tripping
that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three shot
autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, a final trip is performed and autoreclose is blocked.
• Reclosing block signal is applied.
• During the reclaim time
• Auto-reclose conditions by PLC signals ARC-S*_COND have not been met.
In the OC∗, EF∗ and SE∗ protections, each tripping is selected by setting [OC∗-TP∗], [EF∗-TP∗]
or [SE∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip), “Set”(delayed trip by T∗∗∗ and [M∗∗∗]
setting) or “Off”(blocked).
TRDY
t
0
ARC READY
&
S
F/F
R
&
0.0-600.0s
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
SP1
TD1
t
0
S
F/F
R
&
STEP COUNTER
0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT1
ARC-SHOT1
ARC INIT (Trip command)
≥1
ARC REQ
TP1
≥1
"ON" &
[ARCREQ]
"OFF"
+
EXT TRIP
TR1
t
0
ARC_R
ARC-SHOT2
ARC-SHOT3
ARC-FT
ARC-SHOT4
0.01-310.00s
Autoreclose initiation
&
SP2
S
F/F
R
ARC-SHOT5
TD2
t
0
&
0.01-300.00s
TR2
t
0
ARC-SHOT2
ARC_R
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
&
SP3
S
F/F
R
≥1
&
SP4
ARC-FT
CB CLOSE
TARCP
t
0
0.01-300.00s
TRCOV
0
t
0.1-600.0s
ARC-FT
&
0.01-300.00s
ARC_R
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
SP5
0.1-300.0s
ARC_R
TD4
t
0
TR4
t
0
≥1
&
&
S
F/F
R
ARC-SHOT4
TRSET
t
0
&
&
0.01-300.00s
0.01-310.00s
ARC FAIL
Reset
TD3
t
0
TR3
t
0
ARC-SHOT3
ARC-SUCCESS
ARC-SHOT5
S
F/F
R
TD5
t
0
&
0.01-300.00s
TR5
t
0
ARC_R
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
1
SP1
SP2
SP3
SP4
SP5
CLK
&
&
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic
 56 
TW
≥1
≥1
213
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Autoreclose initiation
Programmable binary input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition) is alive and Reclaim time TRDY
has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is ready. The
reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to “0.0-600.0s”.
ARC INIT(Autoreclose initiation) can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose initiation
is active or not is selected by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT].
- OC1 to OC4 trip
- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT TRIP(External autoreclose initiation) is an autoreclose initiation via programmable binary
inputs. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
PLC default setting
CONST 1
302
ARC_READY
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
EXT_TRIP-A
TRDY
t
0
211
≥1
≥1
&
EXT_TRIP-B
≥1
&
≥1
EXT_TRIP-C
≥1
&
≥1
EXT_TRIP
301
&
&
0.0-600.0s
≥1
&
1
ARC initiation
TP1
1 cycle
∗∗∗-INIT = “ON”
ARC_INIT
ARC_NO_ACT
RS-ARCBLK
210
&
ARC_BLK_OR
≥1
&
[EXT-INIT]
+
ARC_BLOCK
ON
BLK
&
∗∗∗-INIT = “BLK”
Figure 2.13.2 Autoreclose Initiation
Autoreclose shot output (ARC-SHOT)
The maximum number of autoreclosing shots is selected by setting [ARC-NUM].
Setting [ARC-NUM] = S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
The passage of TD∗ time(Dead timer) is selected for each shot number by setting [TD∗] to
“0.01-300.00s.”
The command output pulse(One shot) time is selected by setting [TW] to “0.01-10.00s.”
 57 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
&
ARCS1
TD1
t
0
S
&
F/F
0.01-300.00s
R
PLC default setting
ARC-SHOT1
&
303
CONST1
S
ARC-S1_COND
TD2
t
0
R
&
S
R
304
ARC-S2_COND
TD3
t
0
&
&
0.01-300.00s
305
CONST1
ARC-SHOT3
S
ARC-S3_COND
TD4
t
0
&
F/F
R
S4
0.01-300.00s
306
CONST1
ARC-SHOT4
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
ARC-SHOT5
F/F
S3
ARC-SHOT4
TW
0.01-300.00s
CONST1
ARC-SHOT2
ARC-SHOT2 ≥1
ARC-SHOT3
&
F/F
S2
ARC-SHOT1
ARC-S4_COND
TD5
&
0
S
&
F/F
R
S5
0.01-300.00s
CONST1
ARC-SHOT5
307
ARC-S5_COND
Figure 2.13.3 Autoreclosing requirement
Autoreclose success judgement (ARC-SUCCESS)
If a re-trip does not occur within a set period of time after output of the autoreclosing shot, it is
judged to be an Autoreclose success(ARC-SUCCESS).
The period of time is selected by setting [TSUC] to “0.1-600.0s”.
Final trip judgement (ARC-FT)
The following cases are judged ARC-FT(Final Trip) and autoreclose is reset without autoreclose
output.
• Autoreclose initiation when autoreclose initiation is not ready
• Autoreclose initiation after output of the final shot for the setting applied in the multi-shot
mode
• Autorecloce block signal
- Autoreclose block signal by programmable BI
- OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF 4 trip of setting autoreclose block are active.
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
• PLC signal ARC-S∗_COND is not completed. FT is performed after Timer [TR*].
Reset
If the CB CLOSE(CB close condition) signal is alive and the the CB is closed within a period of
time after an autoreclose initiation, the autoreclose is forcibly reset.
The period of time is selected by setting [TRSET] to “0.01-300.00s”.
It is assumed that the CB is not open(=CBF), in spite of the trip output(=autoreclose initiation).
 58 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RS-ARCBLK
≥1
&
CB CLOSE
&
ARC_RESET
TRSET
0
t
0.01-300.00s
ARC_IN-PROG
Figure 2.13.4 Reset
Manual close function (MANUAL CLOSE)
MANUAL CLOSE enables the CB to be closed via a PLC signal input.
Autoreclose initiation is not active within a set period of time after a manual close command output.
The period of time is selected by setting [TARCP] to “0.1-600.0s”.
In the case of final trip judgement, a manual close command output is blocked within a set period of
time. The period of time is selected by setting [TRCOV] to “0.1-600.0s”.
ARC-FT
TARCP
t
0
0.1-600.0s
TRCOV
0
t
1
&
0.1-600.0s
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.5 Manual input function
2.13.3 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.
Element
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
[ARCEN]
Range
0.0 – 600.0 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 10.00 s
0.0 – 600.0 s
0.1 – 600.0 s
0.1 – 600.0 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
Off/On
Step
0.1 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
Default
60.0 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
2.00 s
3.0 s
10.0 s
10.0 s
3.00 s
Off
 59 
Remarks
Reclaim time
1st shot dead time for Stage 1
1st shot reset time for Stage 1
2nd shot dead time for Stage 1
2nd shot reset time for Stage 1
3rd shot dead time for Stage 1
3rd shot reset time for Stage 1
4th shot dead time for Stage 1
4th shot reset time for Stage 1
5th shot dead time for Stage 1
5th shot reset time for Stage 1
Output pulse time
Autoreclose succeed judgement time
Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
Autoreclose reset time
Autoreclose enable
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
[ARC-NUM]
[OC1-INIT]
[OC1-TP1]
[OC1-TP2]
[OC1-TP3]
[OC1-TP4]
[OC1-TP5]
[OC1-TP6]
[OC2-INIT]
[OC2-TP1]
[OC2-TP2]
[OC2-TP3]
[OC2-TP4]
[OC2-TP5]
[OC2-TP6]
[OC3-INIT]
[OC3-TP1]
[OC3-TP2]
[OC3-TP3]
[OC3-TP4]
[OC3-TP5]
[OC3-TP6]
[OC4-INIT]
[OC4-TP1]
[OC4-TP2]
[OC4-TP3]
[OC4-TP4]
[OC4-TP5]
[OC4-TP6]
[EF1-INIT]
[EF1-TP1]
[EF1-TP2]
[EF1-TP3]
[EF1-TP4]
[EF1-TP5]
[EF1-TP6]
[EF2-INIT]
[EF2-TP1]
[EF2-TP2]
[EF2-TP3]
[EF2-TP4]
[EF2-TP5]
[EF2-TP6]
[EF3-INIT]
[EF3-TP1]
[EF3-TP2]
[EF3-TP3]
[EF3-TP4]
Range
S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
Step
Default
S1
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
 60 
Remarks
Autoreclosing shot number
Autoreclose initiation by OC1
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC2
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC3
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by OC4
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF1
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF2
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF3
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
[EF3-TP5]
[EF3-TP6]
[EF4-INIT]
[EF4-TP1]
[EF4-TP2]
[EF4-TP3]
[EF4-TP4]
[EF4-TP5]
[EF4-TP6]
[SE1-INIT]
[SE1-TP1]
[SE1-TP2]
[SE1-TP3]
[SE1-TP4]
[SE1-TP5]
[SE1-TP6]
[SE2-INIT]
[SE2-TP1]
[SE2-TP2]
[SE2-TP3]
[SE2-TP4]
[SE2-TP5]
[SE2-TP6]
[SE3-INIT]
[SE3-TP1]
[SE3-TP2]
[SE3-TP3]
[SE3-TP4]
[SE3-TP5]
[SE3-TP6]
[SE4-INIT]
[SE4-TP1]
[SE4-TP2]
[SE4-TP3]
[SE4-TP4]
[SE4-TP5]
[SE4-TP6]
[EXT-INIT]
Range
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
Step
Default
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
Remarks
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF4
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE1
SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
SE1 trip mode of 5th trip
SE1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE2
SE2 trip mode of 1st trip
SE2 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE2 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE2 trip mode of 4th trip
SE2 trip mode of 5th trip
SE2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE3
SE3 trip mode of 1st trip
SE3 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE3 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE3 trip mode of 4th trip
SE3 trip mode of 5th trip
SE3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by SE4
SE4 trip mode of 1st trip
SE4 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE4 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE4 trip mode of 4th trip
SE4 trip mode of 5th trip
SE4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict one
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required for a higher line voltage or larger fault current.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.
 61 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1
Outline of Front Panel
The case outline of GRE110 is shown in Appendix F.
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the Human Machine Interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display
(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB typeB connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,
status and setting data.
There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP
Red
Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM
Yellow
Lit when a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail
Red
Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED
Red/Green/
Lit when CB is closed.
Yellow
CB OPEN
Green
Lit when CB is open.
LOCAL
Yellow
Lit when Local Control is enabled
REMOTE
Yellow
Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED2)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED3)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED4)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED5)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED6)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
LED1-6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR
gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be changed to one
of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow), the individual statuses of which can be viewed on the LCD
 62 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For operation, see Section 4.2.1. The
TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user, either
by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] as to whether or not it is energised by the output of an
alarm element such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can
be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates
CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit , CB can be controlled by ○ and ｜ keys
on front panel. When the REMOTE LED lit , CB can be controlled by binary input signal or
communication. When neither of these LEDs is lit , the CB control function is disable.
The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) indication on LCD. The ▼ key
makes screen change “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the
LCD is on the Digest screen.
The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light when the LCD is on
the “MAIN MENU”.
The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input
settings or to change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local
personal computer.
Liquid crystal
display
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Control keys
Operation keys
To a local PC
USB type B connector
Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel
(model 400 / 420 / 401 / 421 / 820 / 821 )
 63 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.2 Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE110 model and their respective input
terminal numbers.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
(a) model 400 / 401 / 420 / 421 / 820 /821
Model
Term. No.
of TB1
400 / 401
420 / 421
820 / 821
1-2
A phase current
A phase current
A phase current
3-4
B phase current
B phase current
C phase current
5-6
C phase current
C phase current
Zero phase voltage
7-8
Residual current (E)
Zero sequence
current (SE)
Zero sequence
current (SE)
(b) model 402 / 422
Model
Term. No.
of TB2
402
422
1-2
A phase current
A phase current
3-4
B phase current
B phase current
5-6
C phase current
C phase current
7-8
Residual current (E)
Zero sequence
current (SE)
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRE110 provides 2 (Model 400/420/820) or 6 (Model 401/421/402/422/821) programmable
binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of
Logic level inversion , detection threshold voltage change and Function selection.
Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change
The binary input circuit of the GRE110 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up
and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure
3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or
inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed
contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to
“Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay
times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.
The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range
varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated
model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and
 64 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
BI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection
nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.
In the case of a 48 / 110Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 24V, 48V or
110V for BI1 and BI2, and to 48V or 110V for BI3-BI6.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at
77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In case of 24V and 48V
supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured
for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to
“Enable”. In case TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the binary
input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply
voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
Element
Contents
Range
BI1SNS – BI6SNS
Binary switch
Norm/ Inv
Norm
BITHR1 *
BI1-2 threshold Voltage
48 / 110 / 220
110
(12 / 24 / 48 )
(24)
(24 / 48 / 110 )
(48)
110 / 220
110
(24 / 48)
(24)
(48 / 110)
(110)
Off
BITHR2 *
BI3-6 threshold voltage
Step
Default
TCSPEN
TCS enable
Off / On / Opt-On
BI1PUD – BI6PUD
Delayed pick-up timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
BI1DOD – BI6DOD
Delayed drop-off timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
*At the PC interface software RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring system), BI threshold voltage
settings are indicated by V1, V2 and V3. The V1, V2 and V3 are distinguished with 11th digit of
ordering code for supply voltage, as shown below,:
Supply voltage (11th digt of ordering cord)
V1
V2
V3
110 - 220V (-1x-xx)
48V
110V
24V
48V
12V
24V
110V
220V
48V
110V
24V
48V
220
110V
48V
-
48 - 110V (-2x-xx)
12 - 48V (-Ax-xx)
BITH1
BITH2
BITH1
BITH2
BITH1
BITH2
The binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc
supply voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
 65 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GRE110
(+) (−)
BI1
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
t
0
0
[BI1SNS]
t
BI1
BI1 command
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2
BI2PUD
BI2DOD
t
0
0
t
BI2
BI3
"110V"
BI2 command
"Norm"
[BITHR1]
"220V"
[BI2SNS]
1
+
"Inv"
+
+
"48V"
BI6PUD
BI6
t
0
BI6DOD
0
t
[BI6SNS]
BI6 command
BI6
"Norm"
[BITHR2]
"220V"
"110V"
1
"Inv"
+
+
1
0V
3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the
setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and
LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
[OC1BLK]
BI1 COMMAND
OC1 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC2BLK]
OC2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC3BLK]
OC3 BLOCK
"ON"
[Alarm4]
Alarm 4
"ON"
Figure 3.2.2
Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as
shown in Figure 3.2.2.
 66 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals
Functions
Signal Names (*1)
Driving Contact Condition
OC1 protection block
OC1 BLOCK / OC1BLK
Closed to block
OC2 protection block
OC2 BLOCK / OC2BLK
Closed to block
OC3 protection block
OC3 BLOCK / OC3BLK
Closed to block
OC4 protection block
OC4 BLOCK / OC4BLK
Closed to block
EF1 protection block
EF1 BLOCK / EF1BLK
Closed to block
EF2 protection block
EF2 BLOCK / EF2BLK
Closed to block
EF3 protection block
EF3 BLOCK / EF3BLK
Closed to block
EF4 protection block
EF4 BLOCK / EF4BLK
Closed to block
SEF1 protection block
SEF1 BLOCK / SEF1BLK
Closed to block
SEF2 protection block
SEF2 BLOCK / SEF2BLK
Closed to block
SEF3 protection block
SEF3 BLOCK / SEF3BLK
Closed to block
SEF4 protection block
SEF4 BLOCK / SEF4BLK
Closed to block
Undercurrent protection block
UC BLOCK / UCBLK
Closed to block
Thermal overload protection block
THM BLOCK / THMBLK
Closed to block
Negative sequence OC block
NPS BLOCK / NPSBLK
Closed to block
Broken conductor protection
BCD BLOCK / BCDBLK
Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision
TC FAIL / TCFALM
Trip supply
CB open state monitoring
CB CONT OPN / CBOPN
CB normally open contact closed
CB close state monitoring
CB CONT CLS / CBCLS
CB normally close contact closed
Breaker failure protection initiate
EXT TRIP3PH / EXT3PH
External trip - 3 phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate
EXT TRIP-APH / EXTAPH
External trip - A phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate
EXT TRIP-BPH / EXTBPH
External trip - B phase
Breaker failure protection initiate
EXT TRIP-CPH / EXTCPH
External trip - C phase
Indication remote reset
REMOTE RESET / RMTRST
Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Synchronize clock
SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK
Synchronize clock
Disturbance record store
STORE RECORD / STORCD
Closed to store the record
Alarm 1
Alarm 1 / Alarm1
Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
Alarm 2
Alarm 2 / Alarm2
Closed to display Alarm 2 text.
Alarm 3
Alarm 3 / Alarm3
Closed to display Alarm 3 text.
Alarm 4
Alarm 4 / Alarm4
Closed to display Alarm 4 text.
Remote open command
REMOTE OPEN / RMTOPN
Close to output CB open command.
Remote close command
REMOTE CLOSE / RMTCLS
Close to output CB close command.
Interlock
Control Lock / CNTLCK
Close to block CB close command.
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between two settings groups.
 67 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element
Contents
Range
Step
BI1SGS – BI6SGS
Setting group selection
OFF / 1 / 2
Default
OFF
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message within 22 characters for each
alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when inputs
associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix G. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BO1 to BO4
individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /
CLOSE for CB control. The CB closed control switch ｜ is linked directly to BO1 and the CB
open control switch ○ is linked directly to BO2, and all other signals are blocked from output
relay BO1, when control function is enable.
Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in
Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix H
shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set
by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not
continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous for
the input signal time.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
Signal List
& 4 GATES
Appendix B
Auxiliary relay
&
or
≥1
≥1
≥1
4 GATES
&
TBO
"Ins"
[RESET]
"Dw"
+
"Dl"
0
&
t
0.00 – 10.00s
&
S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
 68 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
[RESET]
Range
Ins / Dl / Dw /Lat
Step
Default
See Appendix C
TBO
0.00 – 10.00s
0.01s
See Appendix C
Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRE110 is provided with a PLC function which enables user-configurable sequence logic based
upon binary signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc.
can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation of fault and disturbance records can be programmed
using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for using a
user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For details of the PLC tool, refer
to the PLC tool instruction manual. (see 6F2S0810 Instruction manual – PLC TOOL)
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool
3.3 Automatic Supervision
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRE110 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
• When a failure occurs, the user should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.
• Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
 69 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of
the AC input circuit is verified. This monitoring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
• CT circuit current monitoring
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) − 4 × Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) ≥ k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 0.2A
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in
the AC input circuit. If the imbalance detected, the relay issues an alarm shown in Table 3.3.1.
A/D accuracy checking
An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and that
the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify
that memory circuits are healthy:
• Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
• Setting value monitoring:
Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
Power supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level is monitored, and is checked to see that the DC voltage is within a
prescribed range.
Issuing of Alarms
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
• A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring:
less than 1s
• AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
 70 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as
described below.
Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by one binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary
input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker
open and closed conditions. Then logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is "1"
under healthy conditions.
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
TC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is
output when TC FAIL is "0".
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the
one BI selected "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB
is closed.
Circuit Breaker
GRE110
CB Trip Coil
Trip Output
+ve
Trip
Supply
-ve Trip
Supply
CB Aux.
Contacts
Binary
Input
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input
t
TC FAIL
≥1
1
(BI command)
0
0
t
&
0.4s
TCSV
0.4s
TC FAIL
(BI command)
CB status “closed”
≥1
&
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows in photo-couplers,
the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open
and closed conditions.
If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip
Circuit Fail alarm.
 71 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two
BIs selected "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is
closed. TCS by 2BIs should be applied BI1 and BI2 for BI inputs. The TCS by 2BIs set the BI
threshold voltage ([BITHR1]) as about the half of trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is
110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] sets "48" (or "12").
Circuit Breaker
GRE110
CB Aux.
Contacts
Trip Output
+ve
Trip
Supply
CB Trip Coil
-ve Trip
Supply
Resistor
Binary Input
(BI2)
Binary Input
(BI1)
Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
The resistors connected in series with the binary inputs are to prevent unnecessary tripping of the
circuit breaker if any one component suffers a short-circuit condition. The value of resistance should
be chosen to limit the current flowing through the circuit breaker trip coil to 60mA in the event of a
short circuit of BI1 with the circuit breaker closed. A typical value for a 110V dc rated circuit is
3.3kΩ.
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the correct condition of the circuit breaker
(CB) in accordance with the position of its auxiliary switches. If two binary inputs are programmed
to the functions ‘CB CONT OPN’(CBOPN) and ‘CB CONT CLS’(CBCLS), then the CB state
monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite states.
Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds, then a CB
state alarm CBSV outputs and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD message and event
record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
CB CONT_OPN
=1
1
t
0
&
1271
CBSV
5.0s
CB CONT_CLS
[CBSMEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn
respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”. (Refer
to Section 4.2.6.8.)
 72 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of the CB is required for checking the health of the trip circuit, the operation
mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a
number of fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to assist in determining the
appropriate time for maintenance of the CB:
• The number of trips is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism.
The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued
and informs the user that maintenance is due when the count exceeds a user-defined setting
TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
• Sum of the broken current quantity ∑Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of
CB. The ∑Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of ∑I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current broken by CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time within
the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally set to 2 to
monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially those for HV
systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting ∑IyALM. The ∑Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by
setting the scheme switch [∑IyAEN].
• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB operating
time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is slow. The
operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase
currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a
user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting
time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme
switch [OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
The CB condition monitoring functions are triggered each time a trip is issued, and they can also be
triggered by an external device via binary input EXT TRIP3PH (EXT3PH) or EXT TRIP∗PH
(EXT∗PH) as shown in Figure 3.3.4. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
(+) (−)
External trip
three-phase
GRE110
BIa
External trip
A-phase
BIa command
[EXT3PH]
EXT3PH
"ON"
[EXTAPH]
BIb
Figure 3.3.4
Binary input setting
BIb command
EXTAPH
"ON"
Binary Input Setting for CB Condition Monitoring
3.3.5 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
 73 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shown
on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [A.M.F.] to "OFF". The
setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item
LCD
Message
LED
"IN SERVICE"
LED
"ALARM"
LED
"Relay fail"
Err: CT
On/Off (2)
On
(4)
CT err
(2)
Relay fail or Relay fail-A
(1)
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
----
Off
On
(4)
----
Power supply monitoring
Err: DC
Off
(3)
Off
Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision
Err:TC
On
On
Off
TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring
Err:CB
On
On
Off
CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm
ALM:TP
COUNT
On
On
Off
TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
Operating time alarm
ALM: OP
time
On
On
Off
OP time ALM, Relay fail-A
∑Iy count alarm
ALM:∑IY
On
On
Off
∑IY-A ALM, ∑IY-B ALM or
∑IY-C ALM, Relay fail-A
AC input imbalance
monitoring
A/D accuracy check
Event record Message
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with " Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM". This monitoring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates except for DC supply fail condition.
3.3.6 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long as
the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
• A/D accuracy check
• Memory monitoring
• Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output (ALM&BLK), or
if only an alarm is output (ALM).
 74 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.7 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
Range
[SVCNT]
Step
Default
Remarks
ALM&BLK / ALM
ALM&BLK
Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[TCSPEN]
OFF/ON/OPT-ON
OFF
Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
CB state monitoring
[TCAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Trip count alarm
[∑IyAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
∑Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Operate time alarm
TCALM
1 - 10000
1
10000
Trip count alarm threshold setting
∑IyALM
10 – 10000 E6
E6
10000
∑Iy alarm threshold setting
YVALUE
1.0 – 2.0
0.1
2.0
y value setting
OPTALM
100 – 5000 ms
10 ms
1000 ms
Operate time alarm threshold setting
The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are set
in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
3.4 Recording Function
The GRE110 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRE110 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Faulted phase
Power system quantities
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence
This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated.
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme that output the tripping command.
 75 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Faulted phase
This is the phase to which a operating command is output.
Power system quantities
The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
-
Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
-
Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
-
Magnitude of zero phase voltage (Ve)
-
Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
-
The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
-
Percentage of thermal capacity (THM)
The zero sequence current Ie in the model 420, 421 and 422 is calculated from the three phase input
currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is displayed the
current fed from CT.
On the model 820 and 821, the input power system quantities are Ia, Ib, Ise and Ve. Therefore, It
can NOT calculate Ie , I1 , I2 and I2/I1.
Table 3.4.1 Displayed Power System Quantities
3.4.2
Power system quantities
Model 400, 401, 402
Model 420, 421, 422
Model 820, 821
Phase current
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ia, Ic
Zero sequence current
Ie
Ie, Ise
Ise
Zero phase voltage
-
-
Ve
Positive and negative
sequence current
I1, I2
I1, I2
-
Ratio of Negative to positive
sequence current
I2 / I1
I2 / I1
-
Percentage of thermal
capacity
THM
THM
THM
Event Recording
The events shown in Appendix C are recorded with the 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI6 command, the user can select the recording items and their status change
mode to initiate recording as below.
One of the following four modes is selectable.Modes
Setting
Not to record the event.
N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate".
O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset".
R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset".
B
For the setting, see the Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 200 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored. The LCD display only
 76 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
shows 100 records. All event records (200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain all
event records on the PC , see the PC software instruction manual.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. The records include maximum four analogue signals (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie), 32 binary
signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B
can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and post-fault recording time can be
set between 0.1 and 4.9s. But the total of pre-fault recording time and post-fault recording time is
5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The
approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is
shown in Table 3.4.2. (Recording time = pre-fault recording time + post-fault recording time)
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time
0.2s
1.0s
1.5s
2.0s
3.0s
4.0s
5.0s
50Hz
40
29
19
14
9
7
5
60Hz
40
24
16
12
8
6
5
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
Time1
0.1-4.9 s
0.1 s
0.3
Pre-fault recording time
Time2
0.1-4.9 s
0.1 s
3.0
Post-fault recording time
OC
0.10-150.00 A
0.01 A
2.00 A
Overcurrent detection
EF
0.05-100.00 A
0.01 A
0.60 A
Earth fault detection
SE
0.025-2.500 A
0.001 A
0.200 A
Sensitive earth fault detection
NPS
0.10-10.00 A
0.01 A
0.40 A
Negative sequence overcurrent detection
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
Element
Range
[Trip]
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/ON
ON
Start by tripping command
[BI]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by Binary Input signal
[OC]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by OC operation
[EF]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by EF operation
[SEF]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by SEF operation
[NPS]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by NPS operation
 77 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.5 Metering Function
The GRE110 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay
front panel or on the local or remote PC.
-
Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
-
Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
-
Magnitude of zero phase voltage (Ve)
-
Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
-
The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
-
Percentage of thermal capacity (THM)
-
Maximum phase current (Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax)
-
Maximum zero sequence current (Iemax, Isemax)
-
Maximum zero phase voltage (Vemax)
-
Maximum negative sequence currents (I2max)
-
Maximum ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 max)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as
determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well. For
the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In
the case of the maximum value displays above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling 15
minute time window, and the maximum recorded average value is shown on the display screen.
The zero sequence current Ie in the model 420 is calculated from the three phase input currents and
the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is displayed the current fed
from CT.
The zero phase voltage Ve input is for model 820 and 821. On model 820 and 821, the B phase
cuurent Ib is calculated from A phase current Ia and C phase current Ic.
3.6 Control Function
The relay is provided with the following control functions:
• CB control
• Interlocking
• Change of CB control hierarchy
The CB control function operates the CB by using the open command key ○ or close command
key ｜ on the front panel of the relay, a BI command from remote state or by using the
communication function.
The interlock function blocks the CB close command using the control lock signal of the BI
command.The change of CB control hierarchy changes the CB control state to Local or Remote.
The Local mode is controled at the front panel of the relay (see chapter 4.2.7). The Remote mode is
controlled by BI command or by a communication function of Modbus (see Appendix M) or IEC
61850 (see Appendix P).
 78 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via
the USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using communication function.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 4 .1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
(a) Model 400, 401, 420, 421,820, 821
(b) Model 402, 422
Figure 4.1.1 Front Panel of GRE110 (without cover)
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the mainmenu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display top of
main-menu. If any display is left for about 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 14 LEDs. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
 79 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP
Red
Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM
Yellow
Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail
Red
Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED
R /G / Y
Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN
Green
Lit when CB is open.
Local
Yellow
Lit when Local Control is enabled
Remote
Yellow
Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED2)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED3)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED4)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED5)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED6)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
LED1-6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
Operation keys
,
▼
 ▼, ▲,
▲
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical
values and text strings.
 CANCEL :
Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END :
Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
 ENTER :
Used to store or establish entries.
RESET key
Pressing RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.
Control key
The control keys are used for CB control. When the cursor of the LCD display is not at the CB
control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control key do not function.
① ○ : Used for CB open operation. When CB is in the open position, the ○ key does
not function.
 80 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When CB is in the closed position, the ｜ key
does not function
③
L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when control function is enable.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following three interfaces are mounted as communication ports:
•
USB port
•
RS485 port
•
Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front
panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting operation and display functions
can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication or the IEC60870-5-103 communication to
connect between relays and to construct a network communication system.
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
TB2
TB1
RS485 Port
Figure 4.1.2 Location of Communication Port
Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port for model 402A and 422A
An optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to substation automation system via an Ethernet
communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) for
Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.3.
 81 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TB1
TB2
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
ｆor Optional
Communication Port
Figure 4.1.3 Location of Optional Communication Port
4.2 Operation of the User Interface
The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation
When the GRE110 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The
following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I
N D 1
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0 ]
I
N D 2
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0 ]
I
a
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
s
*
.
*
*
*
k A
Metering
e
*
 82 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To clear latched LEDs of Latest fault indications, press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I
N D 1
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0 ]
I
N D 2
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s
e
A B C E
: Faulted phases.
: Tripping element
O C 1
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit
as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to turn off the LEDs; Trip LED and configurable LEDs
(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latched signal by trigger of tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.
•
Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Displays in automatic supervision operation
Auto-supervision
E r
r
:
R O M ,
A /
D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"
screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED
lights.
 83 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"
LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest
"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
•
Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
:
A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For
setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRE110. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
 84 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MENU
Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test
Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 85 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count and ΣIy count can be displayed or erased.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or Modbus), adjusts a clock
and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate in RSM,
the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and
configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, description, relay address and
baud rate in Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary
outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is at Local / Remote position,
the CB control location change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is at CB close/open
position, the CB control keys ○ and ｜ are enabled.
Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
＞ R e
M A I
N
c
d
o
r
M E N U
S t
a t
u s
S e
t
.
(
v
i
S e
t
.
(
c
h a n g
C o
n t
o
l
T e
s
r
e
w )
e
)
t
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the ▼ key to turn
off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The
8th line under item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " or " " displayed on the far right
shows that lower or upper lines exist.
 86 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.
/
4
T r
S c
i
p
> T r
i
p
O f
f
/
h e
m e
s
w
_
1
O n
B I
O f
1
f
/
O n
O C
O f
1
f
/
O n
E F
O f
1
f
/
O n
S E F
O f
f
1
/
O n
N P S
O f
f
1
/
O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
E, press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count and ΣIy count.
4.2.3.1
Displaying Fault Records
To display fault records, do the following:
• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/
1
R e
c
o
r
d
＞ F a
u l
t
u r
b
a
E v
e
n t
D i
s
t
C o
u n t
e
n c
r
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
 87 
E
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
2
F a
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
u l
t
r
e
c
o
r
d
r
• Select "View record" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/
3
F a u l
t
＞ ♯ 1
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 0
9
0 :
0
0
:
.
0 0
0
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 0
9
0 :
0
0
:
.
0 0
0
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 0
9
0 :
0
0
:
.
0
0
♯ 2
0
♯ 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/
4
F a u l
t
♯ 1
0 1 /
J
a n /
2 0
0
9
0 0 :
0
0 :
0
0 .
0
0 0
P h a
s
e
A B C E
P r
f
a u l
t
O C 1
e
v
a l
u e
I
a
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
s
*
.
*
*
*
k A
I
1
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2 /
I
1
*
*
.
*
*
F a u
l
t
v
a l
u e
s
e
*
I
a
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
*
*
.
*
*
k A
s
 88 
Not available for model 400 series.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I
e
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
s
*
.
*
*
*
k A
I
1
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2 /
*
*
.
*
*
*
*
*
.
*
e
*
I
1
T H M
%
0 1 /
J
a n /
2 0
1
1
1 8 :
1
3 :
5
8 .
0
3 1
A R C -
S 1
0 1 /
J
a n /
2 0
1
1
1 8 :
1
3 :
9 .
0
3 1
O C 1
,
A R C -
5
Not available for model 400 series.
F T
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d
s
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in back-up RAM.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.
If the metering value exceed the displayable digits, the metering value indicate maximam value and
“*” at the right of unit.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.3.2
Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:
• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
2
E v
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
e
n t
r
e
c
o
r
 89 
r
d
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/
3
E v
e
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
i
p
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
i
p
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
i
p
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
i
p
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
i
p
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2 0
0
O C 1
･ A
t
r
p
▲
/
3
▼
2 4 /
The time is displayed by pressing the
Press the
n t
i
9
1
0 0
O n
9
0
9 9
O N
9
9 8
O n
9
0
0 4
O n
9
0
0 2
O n
9
0
0 1
O n
key.
E v e
n t
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5 .
2
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5 .
2
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5 .
1
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4 .
2
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
P
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4 .
2
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4 .
1
O C 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4 .
1
O C 1
･
A
t
r
p
i
1 1
O n
0 0
O N
1 1
O n
1 1
O N
0 0
O N
1 1
O n
0 0
O n
key to return the screen with date.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
 90 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d
s
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in back-up RAM.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3
Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.
• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
2
D i
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
s
t
u r
b a
n c
r
e
o
d
c
r
e
r
• Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/
3
D i
♯ 1
0
♯ 2
0
♯ 3
0
s
t
u r
b
a n c
0 1
/
J
a
n /
0 :
0
0
:
0
0 1
/
J
a
n /
0 :
0
0
:
0
0 1
/
J
a
n /
0 :
0
0
:
0
e
2
0
0 9
0 .
0
0 0
2
0
0 9
0 .
0
0 0
2
0
0 9
0 .
0
0 0
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
 91 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d
s
C A N C E L =
N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.3.4
Displaying Counter
• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
2
C o
u n t
c
o
e
r
＞ V i
e
w
u n t
e
r
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p
s
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p
s
A
(*)
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p
s
B
(*)
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p
s
C
(*)
C l
e
a
r
Σ I
^ y
A
C l
e
a
r
Σ I
^ y
B
C l
e
a
r
Σ I
^ y
C
C l
e
a
r
A R C s
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/
3
C o
u n t
e
r
*
*
*
*
*
*
T r
i
p
s
T r
i
p
s
A
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
T r
i
p
s
B
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
T r
i
p
s
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
Σ I
^
y
A
*
*
*
*
*
*
E 6
Σ I
^
y
B
*
*
*
*
*
*
E 6
Σ I
^
y
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
E 6
A R C s
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
 92 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
To clear each count, do the following:
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
A ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
B ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
C ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Σ I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
Σ I
E N D = Y
＾ ｙ A ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Σ I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
E N D = Y
Σ I
＾ ｙ B ?
C A N C E L = N
 93 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Clear Σ I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
Σ I
E N D = Y
＾ ｙ C ?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1
Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/
1
S t
a t
u s
＞ M e
t
e
r
i
n g
D i
r
e
c
t
i
B i
n a
r
y
R e
l
y
T i
m e
C l
o
a
c
L C D
s
k
c
o
o
n
I
/
O
e
l
e
m e
y
n c
.
a
d j
u s
t
a
t
n t
r
Display at model 820 and 821
s
n t
.
• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.(Primary current display setting)
/
2
I
M e
i
n g
a
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
s
*
*
*
*
k A
Not available for model 400 series.
I
1
*
*
.
*
*
k A
Not available for model 820 and 821.
I
2
*
*
.
*
*
k A
Not available for model 820 and 821.
e
t
e
r
 94 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I
2
/
I
1
T H M
V e
*
*
*
.
*
*
Not available for model 820 and 821.
*
*
*
.
*
%
*
*
.
*
*
k V
Display at model 820 and 821
I
a
m a
x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
m a
x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
m a
x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
m a
x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
s
e
m a x
*
*
*
*
k A
Not available for model 400 series.
I
2
m a
x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
Not available for model 820 and 821.
I
2
1
m a x
*
*
.
*
*
*
*
.
*
*
V e
m a
x
*
Not available for model 820 and 821.
k V
Display at model 820 and 821
To clear all max data, do the following:
• Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
E N D = Y
m a
x
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in back-up RAM.
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
 95 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.4.2
Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
I
/
O
I
P
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
]
O P
[
0
0
0 0
0
]
O P 2 [
0
0
0 0
]
The display format is shown below.
[





Input (IP)
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Output (OP)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
FAIL
Output (OP2)
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
]
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 400 and 420.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.
The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output
relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
Line 3 shows the binary output status for model 402 or 422. BO5-8 (OP2) are available only at
model 402 or 422.
4.2.4.3
Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/
2
R y
e
l
e
m e
n t
A
O C 1 -
4
[
0
0
0 0
]
B
O C 1 -
4
[
0
0
0 0
]
C
O C 1 -
4
[
0
0
0 0
]
E F 1
-
4
[
0
0
0 0
]
Not available for model 820 and 821.
S E 1
-
4
[
0
0
0 0
]
Not available for model 400 series.
A
U C 1 ･
2
[
0
0
]
B
U C 1 ･
2
[
0
0
]
C
U C 1 ･
2
[
0
0
]
[
0
0
]
T H M
 96 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
N P S ,
B C
[
0
0
0
C B F A B C
[
0
0
0 0
C o
[
0
0
0 0
]
[
0
0
0
]
I
l
d
L d
C D
]
0
Not available for model 820 and 821.
0 ]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[



A OC1-4
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
A phase OC elements
B OC1-4
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
B phase OC elements
C OC1-4
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
C phase OC elements
EF1-4
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SE1-4
SE1
SE2
SE3
SE4
A UC1-2
UC1
UC2
-
-
A phase UC elements
B UC1-2
UC1
UC2
-
-
B phase UC elements
C UC1-2
THM
NPS, BC
UC1 UC2
Alarm Trip
NPS1 NPS2
A
B
CBF TRIP
0
1
A
B
C
BC
A
B
C
CBF RETRIP
3
C phase UC elements
CBFABC
Cold Ld
ICD
2
C
]
Cold Load state
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4
Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRE110 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input
signal clock, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP(IEC61850). To display on the LCD whether
these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with,
do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/
2
T i
*
B I
m e
s
y
n c
.
:
A C T .
:
I
n a c
t
E C
I
n a c
t
S N T P
I
n a c
t
M o
I
d b
u s
 97 
.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5
Clock Adjustment
To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/
2
> M i
H o
D a
2 6 /
A u g
/
0 0 :
0 0
0 0
n u t
e
Y e
0
_
0
_
6
_
8
_
9
_
0
0 9
[
L ]
u r
y
2
M o
:
2
n t
h
a r
2 0 0
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [M] or [S] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6
LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
 98 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
2
L C D
C o
n t
r
a
s
t
■ ■ ■ ■
4.2.4.7
▼
▼
▲
▲
• Press the
or
key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the
key.+
key and deep by pressing the
Direction
The direction display is available at model 820 and 821.
To display thedirection of earth fault current for testing, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/
2
I
s
D i
e
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
At normal condition, display “-------”. If the Ise input dirrection is same as Ve, displayed
“Forwaed”. If the Ise input direction is same as –Ve, displayed “Reverse”.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the Modbus communication or optional communication.
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1
Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.
 99 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/
1
S e
t
.
(
v
i
e
w )
> V e
r
s
i
o
n
D e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
C o
m m s
R e
c
o
r
S t
a
t
u s
P r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B i
n a
r
y
I
/
P
B i
n a
r
y
O /
P
o
d
L E D
C o
n t
r
F r
e
u e
q
l
n c
y
• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/
2
V e
r
> R e
l
a
y
S o
f
t
s
i
o
n
t
y
p e
w a r
e
.
• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE110-400A-10-10)
G R E 1 1
-
1
0
-
4
0
0 A -
1 0
0
• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version and PLC data.
(ex.;GS1EM1-01-A)
■ S o
4.2.5.2
f
t
w a
r
e
G S 1
E M 1
-
0
■ P L C
d
a
1
-
*
a
t
P G R E 1
1
0 A *
*
*
(
*
*
)
*
*
*
*
*
*
Settings
The "Description","Comms","Record","Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P","LED" ,
"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set.(change)"
sub-menu.
 100 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and IP address
Baud rate in IEC60870-103 or Modbus
IEC 61850 setting
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings :
Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending
on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings
changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1
Setting Method
There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item
If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
 101 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
1
S e
t
.
(
c
> P a
s
s
w o
r
d
D e
s
c
r
p
C o
m m s
R e
c
S t
a t
u s
P r
o
t
e
c
t
B i
n a
r
B i
n a
o
h a
n g
t
i
o
n
i
o
n
y
I
/
P
r
y
O /
P
o
i
r
e
)
d
L E D
C o
n t
r
F r
e
u e
q
l
n c
y
• Move the cursor to a setting item.
• Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string
Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/
2
D e
> P l
D e
s
c
a n t
s
c
r
i
r
i
p t
n a
m e
p
i
t
i
o
o
n
n
▼
▲
and
to move blinking cursor down, up, left and
To select a character, use keys ▼ , ▲ ,
right. "→" and "←" on final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22
characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d
e
g h i
j
K l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
u v
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
)
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
♯
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
f
 
• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.
• Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
 102 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values
When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/
4
T i
T i
m e
m e
/
S t
1
a
r
_
t
e
r
s
> T i
m e
1
2
.
0 s
T i
m e
2
2
.
0 s
O C
2 .
0
0 A
E F
0 .
6
0 A
.
2
0
0 A
Not available for model 400 series.
0 .
4
0 A
Not available for model 820 series.
S E F
0
N P S
key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the
▲
▼
or
or
▼
• Press the
key.
▲
• Move the cursor to a setting line.
• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical
value.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note:If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are
not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set.
(change)" sub-menu.
 103 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
C h a
n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back
to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far
and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2
Password
For the sake of security of setting changes password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S e
I
t
.
(
c
h a n g
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
[
6
7 8
9
e
)
_
]
0 ＜
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
S e
t
.
R e
t
y
p
e
1 2
3
4 5
(
c
h a n g
[
6 7
8
9
_
e
)
]
0 ＜
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
 104 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S e
t
(
c
P a
s
w o r
d
1 2
3 4
5
8
s
.
6 7
h a n g
[
9
e
)
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password
again.
4.2.6.3
Plant Name
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/
2
D e
> P l
D e
s
c
a n t
s
c
r
i
r
i
p t
n a
m e
p
i
t
o
i
o
n
n
• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d
e
g h i
j
k l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
u v
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
)
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
♯
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
• Enter the text string.
 105 
f
 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.4
Communication
If the relay is linked with Modbus or optional communication, the relay address must be set. Do this
as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/
2
C o
m m s
＞ A d
d r
.
/
c
h
S w i
t
P a
r
a
m .
• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/
3
M o
A d
d b
> M o
d
d r
.
/
P a
r
a
u s
_
b
1
u s
I
E C
I
P 1
‐ 1
0
I
P 1
‐ 2
0
I
P 1
‐ 3
0
I
P 1
‐ 4
0
S M 1
‐ 1
0
S M 1
‐ 2
0
S M 1
‐ 3
0
S M 1
‐ 4
0
G W 1
‐ 1
0
G W 1
‐ 2
0
G W 1
‐ 3
0
G W 1
‐ 4
0
I
P 2
‐ 1
0
I
P 2
‐ 2
0
I
P 2
‐ 3
0
I
P 2
‐ 4
0
S M 2
‐ 1
0
S M 2
‐ 2
0
S M 2
‐ 3
0
S M 2
‐ 4
0
G W 2
‐ 1
0
G W 2
‐ 2
0
G W 2
‐ 3
0
G W 2
‐ 4
0
m .
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
1
 106 
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A-D.
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is B or D.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I
E C B 1
1
I
E C B 2
2
I
E C B 3
3
I
E C B 4
4
I
E C G T
1
I
E C A T
1
I
E C B T
1
I
E C C T
1
I
E C E 1
0
I
E C E 2
0
I
E C E 3
0
I
E C E 4
0
I
E C E 5
0
I
E C E 6
0
I
E C E 7
0
I
E C E 8
0
I
E C I
1
0
I
E C I
2
0
I
E C I
3
0
I
E C I
4
0
I
E C I
5
0
I
E C I
6
0
I
E C I
7
0
I
E C I
8
0
I
E C 2
B 1
1
I
E C 2
B 2
2
I
E C 2
B 3
3
I
E C 2
B 4
4
I
E C 2
G T
1
I
E C 2
A T
1
I
E C 2
B T
1
I
E C 2
C T
1
I
E C 2
E 1
0
I
E C 2
E 2
0
I
E C 2
E 3
0
I
E C 2
E 4
0
I
E C 2
E 5
0
I
E C 2
E 6
0
I
E C 2
E 7
0
I
E C 2
E 8
0
I
E C 2
I
1
0
I
E C 2
I
2
0
I
E C 2
I
3
0
 107 
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I
E C 2
I
4
0
I
E C 2
I
5
0
I
E C 2
I
6
0
I
E C 2
I
7
0
I
E C 2
I
8
0
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A-D.
S M O D E
0
G O I
N T
1
s
D E A D T
1
s
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A-D and
“RS485P” in comms switch settimg
is ”off”.
• Enter the relay address number on the "Modbus" line for Modbus or the "IEC" line for
IEC60870-5-103 and press the ENTER key.
• Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI2-4. two SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and
synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG2-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗ (IP1-1. IP1-2. IP1-3. IP1-4) and (IP2-1. IP2-2. IP2-3. IP2-4)
SM1-1 to SM2-4, GW1-1 to GW2-4, SI1-1 to SI2-4: same as above.
• Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not duplicate the relay address number.
Settings for IEC60870-5-103 communication
The lines "IECB1" to "IECB4" are used for auxiliary inputs for IEC103 events INF27 to
INF30 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECB1" to "IECB4" by entering the
number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.
The lines "IECGT" to "IECCT" are used for fault indications for IEC103 events INF68 to
INF71 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECGT" to "IECCT" by entering the BO
numbers (1 to 8) corresponding to the binary output settings.
The lines "IECE1" to "IECE8" are used to assign the signals for user customization. Assign
signals to the columns "IECE1" to "IECE8" by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B.
Note: Assign "0" to the column when the function is not used.
The lines "IECI1" to "IECI8" are used to assign the above signals from "IECE1" to "IECE8" to
each INF number. Enter the INF number to the columns "IECI1" to "IECI8".
Settings for IEC61850 communication
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time of IEC 16850
communication.
Setting for Modbus communication
• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., for Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 and IEC61850.
 108 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
3
S w i
t
c
R S 4 8
5
B R
> R S 4
8
5 B R
/
1 9
9
.
I
E C B L K
N o
6
r
m a l
.
h
2
0
/
B l
o
R S 4
8
5 P
O f
f
/
M o
E t
h e
r
P
O f
f
/
I
E C 6 1 8
1 8
5
0 B L K
6
N o
r
m a l
f
/
d
/
N G C H K
O f
f
I
I
E C G I
2
Y e
s
E C G I
3
N o
I
Y e
s
E C G I
4
N o
I
s
E C G I
5
s
E C G I
6
s
E C G I
7
s
E C G I
8
Y e
/
/
/
N o
/
0
o
c
k e
d
0
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A-D and
“RS485P” in comms switch settimg
is ”off”.
0
0
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
0
0
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
s
G I
Y e
0
s
G I
Y e
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A0-D0.
0
s
G I
Y e
E C 2
B l
5 0
s
G I
Y e
E C 2
N o
I
/
E C 2
N o
I
/
E C 2
N o
I
/
Y e
N o
I
/
Y e
N o
I
/
Y e
N o
I
/
Y e
N o
I
1
s
/
3
O n
Y e
N o
0
O n
E C G I
/
E C 1
0
P I
N o
I
O n
f
I
/
0
O f
/
d
0
G S E C H K
/
k e
0
T S T M O D
O f
c
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
s
 109 
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I
E C 2
N o
I
/
/
E C 2
N o
/
E C N F I
1
.
/
0
7
0
8
0
s
I
2
6
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
s
G I
Y e
0
s
G I
Y e
5
s
G I
Y e
E C 2
N o
I
Y e
E C 2
N o
I
/
G I
2 .
0
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
4
<RS485BR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols are applied.
<IECBLK>
Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<IECNFI >
This line is to select the normalized factor (1.2 or 2.4) of the current measurand.
<IECGI1 - 8 >
These lines are to use the GI (General Interrogation) or not for user customized signals. If GI is to
be used , enter 1(=Yes).
<RS485P>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 system
applied.
<EtherP>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the IEC61850 system applied.
<61850BLK>
Select 1 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC61850 communication. When
using the IEC61850 communication, select 0 (=Normal).
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address which
is set on PG∗-∗.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
• Select the number and press the ENTER key.
 110 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.5
Setting the Recording
To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/
2
R e
c
o
r
d
u r
b
a
> E v
e
n t
D i
s
t
C o
u n t
e
n c
e
r
Setting the event recording
• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
3
B I
E v
e
n t
c
o
m m .
_
o
3
1
> B I
1
c
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
2
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
3
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
4
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
5
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
6
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
o
o
o
o
o
m m .
3
3
3
3
3
B
• Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording
• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
3
D i
s
t
b a
n c
> T i
m e
/
S t
a
r
t
e
S c
h e
m e
s
w
B i
n a
r
s
i
g
.
y
u r
 111 
r
e
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
/
4
T i
T i
m e
m e
/
S t
1
a
r
t
_
e
r
s
> T i
m e
1
2
.
0 s
T i
m e
2
2
.
0 s
O C
2 .
0
0 A
E F
0 .
6
0 A
.
2
0
0 A
Not available for model 400 series.
0 .
4
0 A
Not available for model 820 series
S E F
0
N P S
• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
4
S c
T R I
P
m e
s
P
O f
/
1
O n
B I
O f
1
f
/
O n
O C
O f
1
f
/
O n
E F
O f
1
f
/
O n
S E F
O f
f
1
/
f
Not available for model 400 series.
O n
Not available for model 400 series.
N P S
O f
w
_
> T R I
f
h e
1
/
Not available for model 820 series.
O n
Not available for model 820 series.
• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
• Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/
4
S I
B i
n a r
y
s
i
G 1
g
_
> S I
G 1
5
1
S I
G 2
5
1
S I
G 3
5
1
S I
G 4
5
1
S I
G 5
5
1
S I
G 6
5
1
 112 
.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S I
G 3
2
5
1
• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B.
Setting the counter
• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
3
C o
u n t
e
r
> S c
h e
m e
s
w
A l
a r
m
e
t
s
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
4
S c
h e
m e
s
w
T C S P E N
_
> T C S P E N
O f
f
/
1
O n /
O p t
-
C B S M E N
O f
f
/
1
O n
T C A E N
1
O f
f
/
Σ I
y
A E N
O f
f
/
O n
1
O n
O P T A E N
O f
f
/
O n
1
O n
• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set threshold setting, do the following:
• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/
4
A l
a
r
m
s
e
t
T C A L M
_
> T C A L M
1
0 0
0
0
1
0 0
0
0 E 6
Y V A L U E
2
.
0
O P T A L M
5 0
0
0 m s
Σ I
y
A L M
• Enter the threshold settings.
 113 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.6
Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/
2
> M e
S t
a
t
u s
t
r
i
n g
e
T i
m e
s
y
n c
T i
m e
z
o
n e
.
This setting is displayed if submodel of
communication type is A-D.
Setting the metering
• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/
3
M e
t
e
p l
a
y
_
> D i
s
p
l
a y
1
P r
i
/
S e
D i
s
r
c
i
/
n g
P r
i
-
A
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).
Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Setting the time synchronisation
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus or
IEC103 or SNTP. This is selected by setting as follows.
• Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.
/
3
T i
T i
m e
> T i
O f
s
y
y
n c
.
s
y
n c
.
B I
/
M o
d
s
m e
f
m e
/
n c
.
_
1
/
1 0
3
/
S N T P
• Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=Mod) to be synchronised with the Modbus.
Enter 3(=103) to be synchronised with the IEC103.
Enter 4(=SNTP) to be synchronised with the SNTP.
 114 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status"
sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone
When the calendar clock is synchronized with the SNTP time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
•
Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hours)
and GMTm (minutes), and press the ENTER key.
/
3
T i
m e
z
o
n e
G M T
_
> G M T
G M T m
4.2.6.7
.
+ 0 h r
s
+ 0 m i
n
Protection
The GRE110 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/
2
P r
o
t
> C h a n g
c
t
i
o
n
e
a
c
t
.
g
C h a n g
e
s
e
t
C o
g
p y
e
p
p
.
.
Changing the active group
• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/
3
C h a
g
p
.
t
i
v
e
> A c
t
i
v
A c
n g
e
g
p
.
_
g
p .
1
e
a
c
t
• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
 115 
.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Changing the settings
Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix D and H. To change the settings, do the following:
• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/
3
A c
> C o
t
g
m m o
n
G r
o
u p
1
G r
o
u p
2
p
.
= 1
Setting the common
To set the application setting, do the following.
/
4
C o
m m o
n
A O L E D
_
> A O L E D
1
O f
f
/
O n
<AOLED>
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
• Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the group
• Select the group to change the settings and press the ENTER key.
/
4
G r
> P a r
a
T r
p
i
o
u p
m e
t
＊
e
r
A R C
Setting the parameter
Enter the line name and the CT ratio as follows:
• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/
5
P a
> L i
n e
C T
r
r
a
m e
n a
a t
i
t
e
r
m e
o
On model 820 and 821,”CT/VT ratio”
• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.
• Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
 116 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.
/
6
C T
r
a
t
i
o
O C C T
_
> O C C T
４ 0 0
E F C T
2
0 0
Not available for model 420 series.
S E F C T
4
0 0
Not available for model 400 series.
V E V T
0
Display at model 820 and 821
• Enter the CT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function
To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/
5
T r
i
> S c
h e
m e
o
.
P r
t
p
e
s
w
l
e
m e
n t
Setting the scheme switch
• Select "Scheme sw" to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
6
S c
h e
m e
> A p p l
i
c
a t
P F
p
r
o
t
.
E F
p
r
o
t
.
p
r
o
t
.
p r
o
S E F
M i
s
c
.
i
s
w
o
n
Not available for model 400 series.
t
.
Setting the application
To set the application setting, do the following.
• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/
7
A p
p l
i
c
a
t
i
o
M O C 1
_
> M O C 1
1
D /
I
E C /
I
E E E /
I
E E E /
M O C 2
D /
I
E C /
I
E C /
U S /
C
1
M E F 1
D /
n
U S /
C
1
I
E E E /
U S /
Not available for model 820 series.
C
 117 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
M E F 2
D /
I
1
E C /
I
E E E /
M S E 1
D /
I
I
C
1
E C /
I
E E E /
M S E 2
D /
U S /
Not available for model 820 series.
U S /
Not available for model 400 series.
C
1
E C /
I
E E E /
S V C N T
U S /
Not available for model 400 series.
C
1
A L M & B L K /
Not available for model 820 series.
A L M
<MOC1>, <MEF1>, <MSE1>, <MOC2>, <MEF2>, <MSE2>
To set the OC1, EF1, SE1, OC2, EF2 and SE2 time delay characteristic type, do the following.
• Enter 0(=D, Definite Time) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C, Configurable) and press
the ENTER key.
<SVCNT>
Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic
supervision.
• Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the PF protection
• Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/
7
P F
O C 1
E N
p
r
o
t
.
_
> O C 1 E N
O f
1
/
O n
M O C 1
C -
N I
f
/
V I
M O C 1
M I
/
/
C -
V I
I
E C
E I
I
/
E I
M O C 1
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
O C 1 R
D E P
O C 1 -
2
F
B l
o
N A /
O n
M O C 2
C -
/
V I
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).
0
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).
0
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
c
k
1
/
N I
f
0
0
O C 2 E N
O f
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).
L T I
E E E
/
D E F /
0
/
I
E C
E I
/
0
This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 1(=IEC).
L T I
 118 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
M O C 2
M I
/
C -
V I
I
E E E
/
E I
M O C 2
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
O C 2 R
D E F /
D E P
O C 2 -
2
F
B l
o
N A /
/
O C 3 N A /
c
f
N A /
f
B l
o
c
k
1
O n
2
F
B l
o
/
0
c
f
/
k
1
O n
U C 2 E N
O f
This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
0
U C 1 E N
O f
0
O n
F
O C 4 -
This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 3(=US).
1
2
/
0
k
O C 4 E N
O f
This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE).
0
O C 3 E N
O F f
0
1
O n
<OC1EN>, <OC2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC1 or OC2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC1 or
OC2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MOC1C>, <MOC2C>
To set the Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
the ENTER key.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<OC1R>, <OC2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and
press the ENTER key.
<OC3EN, OC4EN, UC1EN, UC2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The OC4, UC1 and UC2 are the same.
 119 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<OC1-2F, OC2-2F, OC3-2F, OC4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
e
E N D = Y
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection
• Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen. (Not available for Model 820 series)
/
7
E F
E F 1
E N
p
r
o
t
.
_
> E F 1 E N
O f
/
O n
M E F 1
C -
N I
f
1
/
V I
M E F 1
M I
/
/
C -
V I
I
E C
E I
I
/
0
L T I
E E E
/
E I
M E F 1
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
E F 1 R
D E F /
D E P
E F 1 -
2
F
B l
o
N A /
O n
M E F 2
C -
/
V I
M E F 2
M I
/
/
C -
V I
c
I
E C
E I
I
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
M E F 2
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
E F 2 R
D E F /
D E P
E F 2 -
2
F
B l
o
/
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 1(=IEC).
L T I
E E E
E I
E F 3 E N
0
k
/
N A /
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).
1
/
N I
f
0
0
E F 2 E N
O f
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE).
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 3(=US).
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
0
c
k
1
 120 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f
f
/
E F 3 N A /
O n
2
F
B l
o
0
c
k
E F 4 E N
O f
F /
E F 4 N A /
1
O n
2
F
B l
o
0
c
k
<EF1EN>, <EF2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF1 or EF2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF1 or
EF2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MEF1C>, <MEF2C>
To set the Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
the ENTER key.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<EF1R>, <EF2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press
the ENTER key.
<EF3EN, EF4EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF3, enter 0(=Off)
and press the ENTER key. The EF4 is the same.
<EF1-2F, EF2-2F, EF3-2F, EF4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
E N D = Y
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
 121 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting the SEF protection
• Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen. (Not available for Model 400 series)
/
7
S E 1
S E F
p r
o
t
.
E N
_
> S E 1 E N
O f
/
O n
S E 1 -
D I
F W D /
R E V /
M S E 1
C -
N I
f
1
/
V I
M S E 1
M I
/
/
C -
V I
R
I
0
E C
E I
I
N O N
/
0
E I
M S E 1
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
S E 1 R
D E F /
D E P
S E 1 S
2
O f
O n
f
/
S E 1 N A /
2
F
B l
o
c
D I
F W D /
R E V /
M S E 2
C -
M S E 2
M I
/
/
C -
V I
R
I
E I
I
/
0
C -
U S
C O 2 /
C O 8
S E 2 R
D E F /
D E P
S E 2 -
2
F
B l
o
This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 1(=IEC).
0
This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE).
0
This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 3(=US).
0
This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
0
c
k
S E 3 E N
1
F /
O n
S E 3 -
D I
F W D /
R E V /
S E 3 -
2
F
B l
o
S E 4 E N
Display at model 820 series.
L T I
E E E
M S E 2
N A /
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE),
3(=US) or 4(=C).
N O N
E C
E I
O f
0
0
/
N A /
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US).
1
S E 2 -
V I
0
k
O n
/
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE).
0
/
N I
f
0
0
S E 2 E N
O f
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC).
L T I
E E E
/
Display at model 820 series.
R
0
N O N
Display at model 820 series.
0
c
k
1
 122 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f
F /
O n
S E 4 -
D I
F W D /
R E V /
S E 4 -
2
F
B l
o
N A /
R
f
/
Display at model 820 series.
N O N
0
c
Z P E N
O f
0
k
0
Display at model 820 series.
O n
<SE1EN>, <SE2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF1 or SEF2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF1,
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<SE∗-DIR>
The settings are for model 820 series,to set SEF∗ directional characteristic, do the following.
•
Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.<MSE1C>, <MSE2C>
To set the Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER
key.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<SE1R>, <SE2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the
ENTER key.
<SE1S2>
To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<SE3EN, SE4EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The SEF4 is the same.
<SE1-2F, SE2-2F, SE3-2F, SE4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the SE1, SE2, SE3 and SE4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
 123 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<ZPEN>
The setting is for model 820 series,to set the zero phase sequence power block enable of SEF, do
the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the residual power block function and press the
ENTER key. If disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
e
s
e
E N D = Y
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the Misc. protection
The settings for miscellaneous protection are as follows:
• Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/
7
M i
s
c
.
p
r
o
t
T H M E N
_
> T H M E N
1
O f
f
/
O n
T H M A E N
O f
f
/
O n
N P S 1
E N
O f
O n
f
/
N P S 1
N A /
0
F
B l
o
c
O f
O n
/
N P S 2
0
K
f
0
2
F
B l
o
c
B C D -
0
K
N A /
O n
F
B l
o
f
0
c
K
O n
R T C
O f
f
0
/
D I
R /
O C
C L S G
O f
f
/
0
1
/
C L D O E N
O f
f
/
2 /
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
0
/
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
B T C
O f
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
0
2
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
-
/
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
B C D E N
O f
Not available for model 820 series.
ditto
2
E N
N A /
0
-
N P S 2
f
.
3
/
4
0
O N
 124 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<THMEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal
OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<THMAEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<NPS1EN>, <NPS2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the NPS1EN and NPS2EN and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
NPS1EN, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<BCDEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<NPS1-2F, NPS2-2F, BCD-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the NPS1, NPS2 and BCD against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
<BTC>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the
Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<RTC>
To set the Re-trip control, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
<CLSG>
To set the Cold Load settings group, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
<CLDOEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
E N D = Y
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
 125 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting the protection elements
• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/
6
P r
o
t
.
e
> P F
p
r
o
t
.
E F
p
r
o
t
.
p
r
o
t
.
p
r
o
S E F
M i
s
c
.
l
e
m e
n t
Not available for model 400 series.
t
.
Setting the PF protection
• Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/
7
P F
p
r
o
t
.
O C 1
_
> O C 1
1
.
0 0
T O C 1
1 .
0
0 0
T O C 1
1
.
0 0
s
OC1 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC1]= 0.
0
.
s
OC1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC1] = 1 or [OC1R] = 0.
1 .
0
0 0
1
.
0 0
T O C 2
1 .
0
0 0
T O C 2
1
.
0 0
s
OC2 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC2]= 0.
0
.
s
OC2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC2]
1 .
0
0 0
O C 3
1
.
0 0
A
T O C 3
0
.
0 0
s
O C 4
1
.
0 0
A
T O C 4
0
.
0 0
s
T O C 1
R
T O C 1
R M
O C 2
T O C 2
R
T O C 2
R M
A
0
0
A
OC1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [OC1R] = 1.
A
OC2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [OC2R] = 1.
O C 1 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 2 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of OC2
 126 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
U C 1
1
.
0 0
A
T U C 1
0
.
0 0
s
U C 2
1
.
0 0
A
T U C 2
0
.
0 0
s
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
•
After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
E N D = Y
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Note: Default current settings are shown for a 1A rated relay. They must be multiplied by 5 in the
case of a 5A rated version.
Setting the EF protection
• Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen. (Not available for model 820 series.)
/
7
E F
p
E F 1
r
o
t
.
_
> E F 1
A
1
.
0 0 A
T E F 1
1 .
0
0 0
EF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T E F 1
1
.
0 0 s
EF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF1] =0.
0
.
EF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF1] = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
1 .
0
0 0
1
.
0 0 A
T E F 2
1 .
0
0 0
EF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T E F 2
1
.
0 0 s
EF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF2] =0.
0
.
EF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF2] = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
1 .
0
0 0
E F 3
1
.
0 0 A
T E F 3
0
.
0 0 s
E F 4
1
.
0 0 A
T E F 4
0
.
0 0 s
T E F 1
R
T E F 1
R M
E F 2
T E F 2
R
T E F 2
R M
0 s
0 s
EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [EF1R] = 1.
EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [EF2R] = 1.
E F 1 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF1
 127 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
E F 2 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of EF2
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
e
E N D = Y
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Setting the SEF protection
• Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen. (Not available for model 400 series)
/
7
S E F
S E θ
p
r
o
t
.
_
d
e
g
4 5
d
e
g
3
.
0
V
A
> S E θ
S E V
Display at model 820 series. SEF characteristic angle
Display at model 820 series. ZPS threshold setting.
S E 1
0 .
1
0 0
T S E 1
1 .
0
0 0
T S E 1
1
.
0 0
s
SEF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE1] = 0.
0
.
s
SEF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MSE1] = 1 or [SE1R] = 0.
T S E 1
R
T S E 1
R M
1 .
0
0 0
T S E 1
S 2
0
.
0 0
s
S E 2
0 .
5
0 0
A
T S E 2
1 .
0
0 0
T S E 2
1
.
0 0
s
SEF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE2] = 0.
0
.
s
SEF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MSE2] = 1 or [SE2R] = 0.
1 .
0
0 0
0 .
5
0 0
A
0
.
0 0
s
0 .
5
0 0
A
0
.
0 0
s
T S E 2
R
T S E 2
R M
S E 3
T S E 3
S E 4
T S E 4
0
SEF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
0
SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [SE1R] = 1.
SEF1 Stage 2 Definite time setting.
SEF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [SE2R] = 1.
S E 1 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 1 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 1 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 1 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE1
 128 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S E 1 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 2 -
k
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 -
α
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 -
C
0 .
0
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 -
k r
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 -
β
0
.
0 0
IDMT curve setting of SE2
0
.
0 0
Z P
W
Display at model 820 series. Zero phase Power setting.
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
e
s
E N D = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Setting the Misc. protection
• Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/
7
M i
s
c
.
p r
o
t
.
T H M
_
> T H M
1 .
0
0 A
0 .
0
0 A
1 0
.
0 m i
8
0 %
0 .
2
0 A
Not available for model 820 series.
0 .
0
0 s
ditto
0 .
4
0 A
ditto
0 .
0
0 s
ditto
1 .
0
0 s
ditto
0
.
0 s
ditto
C B F
0 .
5
0 A
T B T C
0 .
5
0 s
T R T C
1 .
0
0 s
1
5 %
0 .
1
0 A
T C L E
1
0
0 s
T C L R
1
0
0 s
C L D O
0 .
5
0 A
T C L D O
0 .
0
0 s
T H M 1
P
T T H M
A
T H M A
N P S 1
T N P S
1
N P S 2
T N P S
2
B C D
T B C D
I
C D -
I
C D O C
I
2
F
n
 129 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
e
s
E N D = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Setting the autoreclose function
To set the autoreclose function, do the following.
• Select "ARC" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "ARC" screen.
/
5
A R C
> S c
h e
A R C
m e
e
l
s
e
w
m e
n t
Setting the scheme switch
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "ARC" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
6
S
c
h e
m e
> G e n
e
r
a
l
O C
P r
o
t
.
E F
P r
o
t
.
P r
o
t
.
P r
o
t
S E F
M i
s
c
s
w
Not available for model 400 series.
.
Setting the the ARC General function
• Select "General" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose mode.
/
7
G e
n e
r
a
l
A R C E N
_
> A R C E N
1
O f
f
/
O n
A R C -
N U M
S 1
2
/
S
/
S 3
0
/
S 4
/
S 5
<ARCEN>
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or disable the autoreclose.
 130 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<ARC-NUM>
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 to set the number of shots.
Enter 0 (= S1) to perform single-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 1 (= S2) to perform two-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 2 (= S3) to perform three-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 3 (= S4) to perform four-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 4 (= S5) to perform five-shot autoreclosing.
Setting the OC, EF, SEF elements for ARC
• Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose initiation and trip mode of the OC
protection.
/
7
O C
O C 1 -
I
> O C 1 N A /
P r
N I
I
N I
O n /
o
T
B l
T P 1
O F F /
I
O C 1 -
T P 2
O F F /
I
O C 1 -
T P 3
O F F /
I
O C 1 -
T P 4
O F F /
I
O C 1 -
T P 5
O F F /
I
O C 1 -
T P 6
O F F /
I
n s
t
O C 2 -
I
N I
T
n s
n s
n s
n s
n s
O n /
T P 1
O F f
I
n s
O C 2 -
T P 2
O F f
I
/
n s
O C 2 -
T P 3
O F f
I
/
n s
t
t
K
/
S e
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
/
S e
t
0
o
c
K
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
T P 4
O F F /
I
O C 2 -
T P 5
O F F /
I
O C 2 -
T P 6
O F F /
I
n s
t
O C 3 -
I
N I
T
n s
c
2
O C 2 -
n s
0
o
2
B l
O C 2 /
.
_
O C 1 -
N A /
t
T
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
/
 131 
S e
t
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
N A /
O n /
B l
O C 3 -
T P 1
O F F /
I
O C 3 -
T P 2
O F F /
I
O C 3 -
T P 3
O F F /
I
O C 3 -
T P 4
O F F /
I
O C 3 -
T P 5
O F F /
I
O C 3 -
T P 6
O F F /
I
n s
t
O C 4 -
I
N I
T
N A /
n s
n s
n s
n s
n s
O n /
T P 1
O F F /
I
O C 4 -
T P 2
O F F /
I
O C 4 -
T P 3
O F F /
I
O C 4 -
T P 4
O F F /
I
O C 4 -
T P 5
O F F /
I
O C 4 -
T P 6
O F F /
I
n s
n s
n s
n s
n s
n s
c
K
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
B l
O C 4 -
o
/
S e
t
0
o
c
K
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
2
t
/
S e
t
• Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to either initiate or block the autoreclose from the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
• Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to “Instantaneous trip” or “Set time delay trip”
in the "OC1-TP1". If not using the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 shows the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.
For OC2 to OC4, the settings are the same as OC1.
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the co-ordination for "COORD-OC" and press
the ENTER key.
After changing settings, press the ENTER key.
The setting method for the EF and SEF is same as that for the OC above.
Setting the ARC Misc. elements
• Select "Misc" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set external initiation of the autoreclose.
 132 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
7
M i
E X T -
I
> E X T N A /
s
c
N I
I
P r
t
T
N I
O n /
o
.
_
T
B l
0
o
c
k
• Enter 1(=On: INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block autoreclose from an external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
Setting ARC element
• Select "ARC element" on the "Group ∗" screen to set the timer setting and the threshold setting
of the OC, EF and SEF elements for co-ordination.
/
6
A R C
e
l
e
m e
n t
T R D Y
_
> T R D Y
6 0
.
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
1
0 .
0
0 s
2 .
0
0 s
3
.
0 s
T R C O V
1 0
.
0 s
T A R C P
1 0
.
0 s
T R S E T
3 .
0
0 s
T D 1
T R 1
3
T D 2
T R 2
3
T D 3
T R 3
3
T D 4
T R 4
3
T D 5
T R 5
3
T W
T S U C
s
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a
n g
E N D = Y
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
 133 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting group copy
To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/
3
C ｏ ｐ ｙ
A
t
o
B
> A
_
B
_
• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8
Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/
2
B i
> B I
n a r
S t
a t
y
I
/
P
u s
B I
1
B I
2
B I
3
B I
4
B I
5
B I
6
A l
a r
m 1
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 2
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 3
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 4
T e
x
t
Setting Binary Input Status
GRE110 can selected binary input detecting threshold voltage. The thresh hold voltage supports
control voltage of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V.
The BI1 and BI2 can change three threshold voltage - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
The BI3 to BI6 can change two threshold voltage – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)
Note: The thresh hold voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Surpervision by
2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage of 48-220V and 12-48 correspond by other relay model, respectively.
To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:
• Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.
 134 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
3
B I
B I
a
t
u S
T H R 1
> B I
4
S t
8
T H R 1
/
1
1
0 /
B I
T H R 2
1
0 /
1
2
1
2
2 0
0
2 0
<BITHR1>
To set the Binary Input 1 and 2 threshold voltage, do the following.
• Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
<BITHR2>
To set the Binary Input 3 to 6 threshold voltage, do the following.
• Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
Selection of Binary Input
• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
Setting Alarm ∗ Text
If the BI selected is used for an alarm, alarm message can be set.
• Select the Alarm∗ text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d
e
g h i
j
k l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
u v
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
)
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
♯
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
f
 
• Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.
/
3
B I
1
> T i
m e
r
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
 135 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting timers
• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/
4
B I
T i
m e
r
1 P U D
s
_
s
> B I
1 P U D
0
.
0 0
s
Pick-up delay setting
B I
1 D O D
0
.
0 0
s
Drop-off delay setting
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
Setting Functions
• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
B I
F u
1
> B I
n c
0
N S
1 S
G S
O f
f
1
m /
/
I
/
O C 1 B L K
f
/
f
/
/
/
g /
f
/
f
/
S
f
/
f
/
0
Not available for model 820 series.
0
Not available for model 820 series.
0
Not available for model 820 series.
0
Not available for model 820 series.
0
Not available for model 400 series.
0
Not available for model 400 series.
0
Not available for model 400 series.
O n
O n
E 2 B L K
O f
S
/
E 1 B L K
O f
S
f
0
O n
E F 4 B L K
O f
0
O n
E F 3 B L K
O f
0
O n
E F 2 B L K
O f
0
O n
E F 1 B L K
O f
2
O n
O C 4 B L K
f
0
O n
O C 3 B L K
f
n v
O n
O C 2 B L K
O f
n s
1 S
B I
O f
o
_
r
O f
i
S N S
N o
O f
t
O n
E 3 B L K
 136 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f
S
f
/
O n
E 4 B L K
O f
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
O n
E X T 3
P H
O f
O n
f
/
E X T A P H
O f
f
/
f
/
f
/
S
f
/
0
0
0
0
0
O n
T O R C D
O f
f
/
O n
A l
a r
m 1
O f
f
/
O n
A l
a r
m 2
O f
f
/
O n
A l
a r
m 3
O f
f
/
O n
A l
a r
m 4
O f
f
O n
/
0
O n
Y N C L K
O f
S
F /
0
O n
R M T R S T
O f
0
O n
E X T C P H
O f
0
O n
E X T B P H
O f
Not available for model 820 series.
O n
C B C L S
O f
0
O n
C B O P N
O f
Not available for model 820 series.
O n
T C F A L M
O f
0
O n
B C D B L K
O f
0
O n
N P S B L K
O f
0
O n
T H M B L K
O f
0
0
0
0
0
R M T O P N
O f
f
/
O n
R M T C L S
O f
f
/
Not available for model 400 series.
O n
U C B L K
O f
0
O n
 137 
Not available for model 820 series.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
C N T L C K
O f
f
/
O n
A R C B L K
O f
f
/
O n
A R C N A T
O f
f
/
O n
A R C M C L
O f
f
/
O n
<BI1SNS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
<BI1SGS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
<Others>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
4.2.6.9
Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRE110 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
 138 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Selection of output relay
•
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a
r
y
O /
P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
B O 5
Available for model 402 and 422.
B O 6
Available for model 402 and 422.
B O 7
Available for model 402 and 422.
B O 8
Available for model 402 and 422.
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/
3
B O ∗
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
F u n c
t
i
o
s
e
t
n s
Setting the logic gate type and timer
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
4
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
i
/
R e
s
c
g i
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
/
D I
I
c
0
/
D w /
L a t
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds on a digest screen.
 139 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
－ － －
I
n
♯ 2
－ － －
I
n
♯ 3
－ － －
I
n
♯ 4
－ － －
T B O
0 .
2
0 s
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 176 (signal names:
"BO1 OP" to "BO8 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when control function is enable.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Three LEDs of the GRE110 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
•
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/
2
L E D
> L E D
V i
r
t
u a l
L E D
Selection of real LEDs
•
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
 140 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
3
L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B
C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/
4
L E D ∗
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
L E D
C o
l
o
e
t
r
Setting the logic gate type and timer
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
5
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
c
/
R e
c
g i
s
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
t
/
I
i
0
L a
t
c
h
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
 141 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
－ － －
I
n
♯ 2
－ － －
I
n
♯ 3
－ － －
I
n
♯ 4
－ － －
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
Setting the LEDs color
• Select "LED color" on the "LED∗ " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the
"LED color" screen.
/
5
C o
L E D
l
> C o
R /
C o
l
o
o r
l
r
_
o
r
G /
Y
0
• Select the LED colors of red , green or yellow.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.
Selection of virtual LEDs
• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/
3
V i
> I
N D 1
I
N D 2
r
t
u a
l
L E D
• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.
 142 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/
4
I
N D 1
> R e
s
e
t
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
Setting the reset timing
• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/
5
R e
R e
s
> R e
I
s
e
t
e t
_
s
e
t
n s
t
/
0
L a
t
c
h
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
B I
F n
c
t
i
o
n s
T 1
_
> B I
T 1
－ － －
B I
T 2
－ － －
B I
T 3
－ － －
B I
T 4
－ － －
B I
T 5
－ － －
B I
T 6
－ － －
B I
T 7
－ － －
B I
T 8
－ － －
• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
 143 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.11 Control
The GRE110 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by the front panel keys.
The interlock function can be blocked the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command by the interlock
signals from binary input signal or communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
• Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/
2
C o
C o
n t
r
o
l
r
o
l
n t
r
o
l
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
n t
e
r
l
o
c
k
0
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
> C o
D i
I
n t
D i
s
_
0
e
e
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function use or not use and press the
ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function use or not use and press the
ENTER key.
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
The GRE110 can change setting of system frequency 50Hz or 60Hz.
• Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/
2
F r
F r
e
> F r
5
0
e
q u e
e
q
H z
q u e
n c
u e
/
y
n c
6 0
n c
y
_
y
0
H z
• Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
ENTER key.
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE110 must reboot to enable the
setting change.
 144 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the CB control function by the front panel keys - ○ , ｜ and
L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1
Local / Remote Control
The "Local/Remote" function provides change of CB control hierarchy.
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
l
> P a
s
s
w o
r
d
(
L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
e
c
l
o
s
/
p
e
n
C t
r
l
C B
e
C t
o
r
l
)
• Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on LCD.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
l
P a
s
s
w o
r
d
(
> L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
e
c
l
o
s
/
p
e
C B
e
o
)
n
• The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.
4.2.7.2
CB close / open Control
The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.
• Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
l
P a
s
s
w o
r
d
(
L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
e
c
l
o
s
/
p
e
> C B
e
C t
o
r
l
)
n
• The ｜ and ○ keys are enabled to control CB – close / open.
4.2.7.3
Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
 145 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
C o
I
n t
r
o
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
l
[
6
7 8
9
_
]
0 ＜
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
C o
n t
e
R e
t
y
p
1 2
3
4 5
r
o
l
[
6 7
8
9
_
]
0 ＜
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
C o
n t
r
w o r
d
P a
s
s
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
8
o
l
[
9
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The
password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password again.
 146 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.8 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flashing. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flashing stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flashing only in a lighting state.
4.2.8.1
Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/
1
T e
> P a
s
S w i
B i
•
s
t
S w o
t
c
h
n A r
y
r
d
(
O /
T e
s
t
)
P
Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/
2
A .
S w i
M .
> A .
O f
t
h
F
_
M .
F
f
O n
/
1
C L P T S T
O f
f
/
S 0 /
0
S 3
T H M R S T
O f
f
/
0
O n
S H O T N U M
O f
I
f
/
S 1 -
0
S 6
E C T S T
O f
f
/
0
O n
• Enter 0 or 1 to disable the A.M.F. or not and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) to reset forcibly the thermal overload element for testing (THMRST) and press
the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
 147 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.8.2
Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
B O 2
D i
s
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
a
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
b l
0
B O 4
D i
e
0
B O 3
D i
b l
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p
e
r
a
t
e
E N T R Y = Y
?
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3
Password
For the sake of security of testing password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
 148 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
T e
I
s
t
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
[
6
7 8
9
_
]
0 ＜
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
T e
s
t
R e
t
y
p
e
1 2
3
4 5
[
6 7
8
9
_
]
0 ＜
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "TEST" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "TEST"
sub-menu screens.
T e
s
t
P a
s
s
w o r
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
d
8
[
9
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password again.
 149 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.3 Personal Computer Interface
The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen using the PC interface software RSM100.
• Display of current waveform:
Oscillograph display
• Symmetrical component analysis:
On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis:
On arbitrary time span
• Frequency analysis:
On arbitrary time span
At the optional communication model, RSM100 can use via Ethernet LAN.
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 MODBUS Interface
The GRE110 supports the MODBUS communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when
the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measure and
status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
• Measurement data:
• Status data:
current
events, fault indications, counters, etc.
• Setting data
• Remote CB operation － Open / Close
• Time setting / synchronization
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See
Section 4.2.6.4.
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
The GRE110 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used
when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand
and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix N.)
• Measurand data: current
• Status data:
events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2
and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication
GRE110 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard with the
provision of an optional communication board. Station bus communication as specified in IEC
61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within a substation control and automation system
 150 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
via Ethernet LAN.
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC 61850
communication.
or TX
Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network
4.7 Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
• Event records
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. or Modbus.
This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by
the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express
year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of
milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input
every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec
(n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and "RSM" is
 151 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay
clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
4.8 Special Mode
The GRE110 shifts to the following special mode by specific key operation.
• LCD contrast adjustment mode
• Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode
When the LCD is not displayed or not displayed clearly, the contrast adjustment of LCD might not
been appropriate. To adjust the contrast of LCD screen on the any screen, do the following:
• Press ▼ and ▲ ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to LCD contrast adjustment mode.
L C D
C o
n t
r
a
s
t
or
▼
• Press the
▲
■ ■ ■ ■
key to adjust the contrast.
LCD and LED check mode
key for 3 seconds or more when LCD is off.
• While pressing
▲
• Press
▲
To check the LCD and LED check , do the following.
key all LEDs are lit and white dots appear on the whole LCD screen.
• Release
▲
Colors of configurable LEDs (LED1-6) are user setting color.
key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.
 152 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for
damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting
The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix F shows the case outlines.
14
5
127
117
13
5
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit
This attachment kits can be mounted on the panel thickness of 1-2.5mm when the included screws
M4x8 are used. When mounted on the panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws and some
washers should be used.
5.2.1
Flush Mounting
For flush mounting the panel cut-out;
・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from front of panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
・Tighten the M4 screw of the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.
The allowed range for the fixing screws’ tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
 153 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
+0.2
+0.2
160 -0.2
143 -0.2
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A
+0.2
160 -0.2
+0.2
217 -0.2
(b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.1 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out
 154 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Fig. 5.2.2 Side view of GRE110 with the mounting attachment kit positions
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A, 421, 820 and 821A
(b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.3 Rear view of GRE110 with tighten the screw of the mounting attachment kits
5.2.2
Dimensions
5.2.2.1
Power Supply
The power supply for the relay can be either DC (range 24-48Vdc, 48-110Vdc, 110-250Vdc) or
AC (110-220Vac-50/60Hz). The voltage range is specified on the relay indicator plate on the front
face. On models 400A, 401A, 420A 421A, 820A and 821A, the power supply should be connected
to terminals 13 and 14 of TB1 and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB1.
On models 402A and 422A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB2
and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB2.
A minimum 1.25mm2 wire size recommended.
 155 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5.2.2.2
Analogue inputs
GRE110-400A, 401A, 402A, 420A, 421A and 422A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth
current. GRE110-820A and 821A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth cuurent and earth
voltage. These current measuring inputs cover both 1 A and 5 A nominal values.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8
of TB1.
On models 402A and 422A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8 of TB2.
On models 820A and 821A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 4 and 7 to 8 of
TB1. The voltage inputs should be connected to terminal 5 to 6 of TB1.
A minimum 2.5 mm2 wire size recommended.
The current input and power supply terminals (TB1 or TB2) can be connected from both sides.
5.2.2.3
Binary inputs
The relay has 2 (or 6) opto-insulated logic inputs. Each input has is separately powered with a dc
voltage.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A, the binary inputs should be connected to
terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of TB2.
On models 402A and 422A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of
TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.4
Binary outputs (Output relays)
Five output relays are available on the relay. Four relays are programmable, the last relay being
assigned to the signaling of a relay fault. BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil
connection.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A, the binary outputs should be connected to
terminals 1 to 10 of TB2.
On models 402A and 422A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.5
RS485 port
The communication connection (RS485 port) is assigned to terminals 21, 23 and 24 of TB2 at model
400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A or TB3 at model 402A and 422A. The total length of
twisted pair wires should not exceed 1200 m.
The transmission wires should be terminated using a 120Ω resistor at both extreme ends of the
cable.
The binary input , binary output and RS485 communication terminal is a single side connected
terminal block.
The relay terminal block size and the clearance between the terminals are shown at Fig 5.2.4.
 156 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
17
24
17
24
TB2
42
TB2
TB3
TB1
6.35
8.7
7.62
10.0
6.35
8.7
10.0
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A , 421A, 820A and 821A
7.62
6.35
7.62
TB1
(b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of the relay
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4 Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause
serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do
not expose them to risk of damage.
5.5 External Connections
External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE110, S3-GRE110
GRE110 has optional case models S1-GRE110 and S3-GRE110.
These models have steel case and S3-GRE110 can realize 2 out of 3 relay logic.
Details are shown in 6F2T0191 and 6F2T0195
 157 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.
Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
GRE110 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
• Before remove the terminal block or cable of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
 158 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests
CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not remove/connect the terminal block of the relay unit.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
• Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase current source
1 Three-phase current source
1 power supply
3 AC ammeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:
Appendix D
Appendix H
Binary Output Default Setting List
Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and auxiliary
supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100
software is required to run the PC.
For the details, see the separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 159 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.4 Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current source is
required.
The testing circuit figures used in this chapter show the circuit diagram for the 400A, 401A, 420A
and 421A models. In the case of the 402A and 422A models, TB1 replaces TB2 and TB2 replaces
TB3.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD ･ LED display
• Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit
in green..
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is
applied.
▲
• Press
key for 3 seconds or more and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and all
LEDs lit.
Operation keys
• Press ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU"
screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU"
screen. Press any keys and check all keys operated.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRE110
TB2
-13
-14
- 19
- 20
+
power
supply
TB1
−
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
- 13
- 14
-12
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 160 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
I
/
O
I
P
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
]
O P
[
0
0
0 0
0
]
O P 2
[
0
0
0 0
]
• Apply the rated supply voltage to terminal 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block
TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
B O 2
D i
s
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
a
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
b l
0
B O 4
D i
e
0
B O 3
D i
b l
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed
collectively.
O p
e
r
a
t
e
E N T R Y = Y
?
C A N C E L = N
 161 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and verifying
that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase current source is required.
GRE110
TB1 -1
A
Single-phase
current
source
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
power
supply
Ia
-2
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
Ib
Ic
IN
-12
Note:
AC input terminal numbers depends on model.
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0(= Primary), change the setting to 1(=Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.
6.5 Function Test
6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realised by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
 162 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION
After testing, must reset settings for testing to the original settings.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.
Assigning signal to LED
•
Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/
2
L E D
> L E D
V i
•
r
t
u a l
L E D
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/
3
L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B
C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/
4
L E D ∗
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
L E D
C o
l
o
e
t
r
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
5
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
c
/
R e
c
g i
s
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
t
/
I
i
0
L a
t
c
 163 
h
e
t
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 2
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 3
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 4
_
_
_
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates the “0”.
Assigning signal to Binary Output Relay
•
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/
3
> L o
B O ∗
g
i
c
/
R e
F u n c
t
i
o
s
n s
 164 
e
t
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
4
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
i
/
R e
s
c
g i
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
/
D l
I
c
0
/
D w /
L a t
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 2
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 3
_
_
_
I
n
♯ 4
_
_
_
0 .
2
0 s
T B O
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates the “0”.
6.5.1.1
Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF
The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
 165 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating current check
Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRE110
+
Single-phase
current
source
−
power
supply
TB1 ∗
A
-∗
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
-12
∗:
Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test Circuit
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
51
UC1-A
71
OC2-A
54
UC2-A
74
OC3-A
57
CBF-A
82
OC4-A
60
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
 166 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating time check for IDMT curve
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.
GRE110
A
Single-phase
current
source
TB1 (∗)
- ( ∗)
BO ∗
TB2- (∗∗)
- (∗∗)
DC
power
supply
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
-12
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(∗), (∗∗) :
Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.2 Testing IDMT
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
51
OC2-A
54
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOCI on the "PF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Change set. (Act gp.= ∗)" screen → "Group∗"
screen → "Trip" screen → "Scheme sw" screen → "PF prot."
The test procedure is as follows:
•
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
•
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
•
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
 167 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.5.1.2
Earth fault element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4
The earth fault element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.
GRE110
+
Single-phase
current
−
source
TB1 -5
A
-6
-7
-8
power
supply
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
-12
Figure 6.5.3 Test Circuit for EF and SEF Elements
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
EF1
63
SEF1
67
EF2
64
SEF2
68
EF3
65
SEF3
69
EF4
66
SEF4
70
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
 168 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating time check for IDMT curve
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.
GRE110
Single-phase
current
source
A
TB1 - 5
-6
-7
TB2- (∗)
-8
BO ∗
Power
supply
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
- ( ∗)
-12
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(∗) :
Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.4 Testing IDMT for EF and SEF Elements
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
EF1
63
SEF1
67
EF2
64
SEF2
68
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MEFI or MSEI on the "EF prot." or
"SEF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Change set. (Act gp.= ∗)" screen → "Group∗"
screen → "Trip" screen → "Scheme sw" screen → "EF prot." or "SEF prot." screen
The test procedure is as follows:
•
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
•
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
•
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-151 class 5.
6.5.1.3
Thermal overload element THMA and THMT
The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
 169 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
THMA
77
THMT
78
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2 × Is to 10 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.5. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.4
Negative sequence overcurrent element NPS1 and NPS2
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.5.
GRE110
Ia
TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase
Current
source
Ib
-3
A
-4
Ic
-5
A
-6
power
supply
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
-12
Figure 6.5.5 Testing NPS elements
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
NPS1
79
NPS2
80
 170 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
• Apply the three-phase balance current and the operating current value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the current applied.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
6.5.1.5
Broken conductor detection element BCD
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.6.
GRE110
Ia
TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase
current
source
Ib
-3
A
-4
Ic
-5
A
-6
power
supply
+
TB1 -13
−
-14
-12
Figure 6.5.6 Testing BCD element
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
BCD
81
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
• Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.6
Cold load protection
The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen on
the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
• Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting group [CLSG].
 171 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping
• Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
• Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TCBF1 and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TCBF2.
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault" screen and
check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix C. There are internal events and external events by binary
input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test
(see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event" screen is correct. Some
of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only
shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance" screen and check
that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on
how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current transformers, check the load current with the metering displays
on the LCD screen.
• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the load current.
/
2
I
i
n g
a
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
b
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
1
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
*
*
.
*
*
T H M
*
*
*
.
*
%
I
*
*
.
*
*
k A
a
M e
/
I
1
m a x
t
e
r
 172 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Note:
I
b
m a x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
c
m a x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
e
m a x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
m a x
*
*
.
*
*
k A
I
2
1
*
*
.
*
*
m a
x
The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
B O 2
D i
s
0
B O 3
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
e
0
B O 4
D i
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p
e
r
a
t
e
E N T E R = Y
?
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the circuit
breaker is tripped.
 173 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message
Failure location
Relay Unit
Err: SUM
×(Flash memory)
Err: RAM
×(SRAM)
Err: BRAM
×(Backup RAM)
Err: EEP
×(EEPROM)
Err: A/D
×(A/D converter)
Err: CT*
× (AC input circuit)(1)
Err: DRIVER
× (BI,BO circuit)(1)
AC cable
CB or Cable
PLC,IEC 61850 data
× (2)
× (2)
Err: PLC
×(PLC data)
Err: CormRun
×(Ethernet LAN)
Err: Ping
×(Ping response)
Err: Map
×(IEC61850 mapping data)
Err: GOOSE
×(GOOSE subscribe)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
* ; In case CT supervision set the Error level.
Alarms detected by supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.2
shows LCD messages and alarm locations.
 174 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location
Message
Failure location
Relay Unit
AC cable
CB or Cable
ALM: CT
×(AC input circuit)(1)
ALM: TC
×(Trip circuit)(1)
× (2)
ALM: CB
×(Circuit breaker)(1)
× (2)
ALM: TP COUNT
×(Trip count)(1)
× (2)
ALM: OP TIME
× (Operation time)
× (2)
ALM: ΣIY
× (Trip current)
× (2)
× (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the power supply
circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "Relay Fail" LED is off, the failure is in the power supply
circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors.
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note:
When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Correct power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay
If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the
protection by replacing the failed relay.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at the component level is not
recommended.
Check that the replacement relay has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type
form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay
CAUTION
After replacing the relay unit, check the settings including the data related to the
PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
The procedure of relay disinstallation and installation is as follows:
• Switch off the power supply.
WARNIN
Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
• Remove the terminal blocks of relay leaving the wiring.
• To remove the relay unit from the panel, the screws of attachments are removed.
• Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
 175 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION
To avoid risk of damage:
• When the attachment kits are removed, be careful for the relay not to fall from panel.
• The cover of front panel is closed while operating it.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.
• Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 176 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
7. Putting Relay into Service
The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
• Check that all the external connections are correct.
• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are
correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during the
tests.
• Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.
• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit.
 177 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix A
Programmable Reset Characteristics and
Implementation of Thermal Model to
IEC60255-149
 178 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Programmable Reset Characteristics
The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset
feature. Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves,
inverse time delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset
characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type
overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive
fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached
during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent.
If a dependent time reset is applied, it attenuate the integrate current, and therefore in the intermittent
fault condition operates rapidly.
Figure A-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay
with Instantaneous
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay
with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay
with Dependent Time
Reset
Figure A-1
 181 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-149
Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
-t
I2 

θ = 2 1 - e τ 1  × 100%
I AOL 

(1)
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the stator,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθ is expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected stator of
motor, where 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at
which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The
thermal limit for any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip
output when θ = 100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant τ, as in Figure A-2. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
θ (%)
100%
I 2 2 × 100%
I AOL

- ｔ



2
θ = I I 2 1 - e τ  × 100%
AOL 



t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.


I2
t =τ·Ln  2 2 
 I - I AOL 
(1)
∙∙∙∙∙ Cold curve
 I2 - I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P 
 I - I AOL 
(2)
∙∙∙∙∙ Hot curve
where:
IP = prior load current.
 182 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
θ (%)
Overload Current
Condition
Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition
Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
 183 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix B
Signal List
 184 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
SIGNAL Name
BI1 COMMAND
BI2 COMMAND
BI3 COMMAND
BI4 COMMAND
BI5 COMMAND
BI6 COMMAND
CONSTANT_0
CONSTANT_1
SET. GROUP1
SET. GROUP2
OC1 BLOCK
OC2 BLOCK
OC3 BLOCK
OC4 BLOCK
EF1 BLOCK
EF2 BLOCK
EF3 BLOCK
EF4 BLOCK
SEF1 BLOCK
SEF2 BLOCK
SEF3 BLOCK
SEF4 BLOCK
UC BLOCK
THM BLOCK
NPS BLOCK
BCD BLOCK
TC FAIL
CB CONT OPN
CB CONT CLS
EXT TRIP-3PH
EXT TRIP-APH
EXT TRIP-BPH
EXT TRIP-CPH
REMOTE RESET
SYNC CLOCK
STORE RECORD
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
Contents
Not in use
Binary Input signal of BI1
Binary Input signal of BI2
Binary Input signal of BI3
Binary Input signal of BI4
Binary Input signal of BI5
Binary Input signal of BI6
Not in use
Not in use
constant 0
constant 1
BI command of change active setting group1
BI command of change active setting group2
Not in use
Not in use
BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
BI command of OC2 protection scheme block
BI command of OC3 protection scheme block
BI command of OC4 protection scheme block
BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
BI command of EF2 protection scheme block
BI command of EF3 protection scheme block
BI command of EF4 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF2 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF3 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF4 protection scheme block
BI command of UC protection scheme block
BI command of THM protection scheme block
BI command of NPS protection scheme block
BI command of BCD protection scheme block
BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
BI command of CB N/O contact
BI command of CB N/C contact
BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
BI command of External trip (A Phase)
BI command of External trip (B Phase)
BI command of External trip (C Phase)
BI command of Remote reset
BI command of Synchronize Clock
BI command of Store Disturbance Record
BI command of Alarm1
BI command of Alarm2
BI command of Alarm3
 185 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
SIGNAL Name
ALARM4
ARC BLOCK
ARC NO ACT
ARC MAN CLS
OC1-A_PICKUP
OC1-B_PICKUP
OC1-C_PICKUP
OC1-A
OC1-B
OC1-C
OC2-A
OC2-B
OC2-C
OC3-A
OC3-B
OC3-C
OC4-A
OC4-B
OC4-C
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC1-B
UC1-C
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
THM-A
THM-T
NPS1
NPS2
BCD
CBF-A
CBF-B
CBF-C
ICLDO-A
ICLDO-B
ICLDO-C
OC1-A HS
OC1-B HS
Contents
BI command of Alarm4
ARC scheme block command
ARC not applied command
ARC Manual close command
OC1-A pick-up
OC1-B pick-up
OC1-C pick-up
OC1-A relay element operate (*)
OC1-B relay element operate (*)
OC1-C relay element operate (*)
OC2-A relay element operate (*)
OC2-B relay element operate (*)
OC2-C relay element operate (*)
OC3-A relay element start
OC3-B relay element start
OC3-C relay element start
OC4-A relay element start
OC4-B relay element start
OC4-C relay element start
EF1 relay element operate (*)
EF2 relay element operate (*)
EF3 relay element start
EF4 relay element start
SEF1 relay element operate (*)
SEF2 relay element operate (*)
SEF3 relay element start
SEF4 relay element start
UC1-A relay element start
UC1-B relay element start
UC1-C relay element start
UC2-A relay element start
UC2-B relay element start
UC2-C relay element start
THERMAL Alarm relay element operate
THERMAL Trip relay element operate
NPS1 relay element start
NPS2 relay element start
BCD relay element start
CBF-A relay element start
CBF-B relay element start
CBF-C relay element start
ICLDO-A relay (OC relay) element start
ICLDO-B relay (OC relay) element start
ICLDO-C relay (OC relay) element start
OC1-A relay element start (High Speed)
OC1-B relay element start (High Speed)
 186 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
SIGNAL Name
OC1-C HS
EF1 HS
EF2 HS
OC1-A_INST
OC1-B_INST
OC1-C_INST
EF1_INST
SEF1_INST
OC1_INST
EF1 PICKUP
EF2 PICKUP
OC1 TRIP
OC1-A TRIP
OC1-B TRIP
OC1-C TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC2-A TRIP
OC2-B TRIP
OC2-C TRIP
OC3 TRIP
OC3-A TRIP
OC3-B TRIP
OC3-C TRIP
OC4 TRIP
OC4-A ALARM
OC4-B ALARM
OC4-C ALARM
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
EF3 TRIP
EF4 ALARM
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF1-S2 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
SEF4 ALARM
UC1 TRIP
UC1-A TRIP
UC1-B TRIP
UC1-C TRIP
UC2 ALARM
UC2-A ALARM
UC2-B ALARM
UC2-C ALARM
THM ALARM
Contents
OC1-C relay element start (High Speed)
EF1 relay element start (High Speed)
EF2 relay element start (High Speed)
OC1-A relay element start
OC1-B relay element start
OC1-C relay element start
EF1 relay element start
SEF1 relay element start
OC1 relay element start
EF1 pick-up
EF2 pick-up
OC1 trip command
OC1 trip command (A Phase)
OC1 trip command (B Phase)
OC1 trip command (C Phase)
OC2 trip command
OC2 trip command (A Phase)
OC2 trip command (B Phase)
OC2 trip command (C Phase)
OC3 trip command
OC3 trip command (A Phase)
OC3 trip command (B Phase)
OC3 trip command (C Phase)
OC4 trip command
OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
EF1 trip command
EF2 trip command
EF3 trip command
EF4 alarm command
SEF1 Stage1 trip command
SEF1 Stage2 trip command
SEF2 trip command
SEF3 trip command
SEF4 alarm command
UC1 trip command
UC1 trip command (A Phase)
UC1 trip command (B Phase)
UC1 trip command (C Phase)
UC2 alarm command
UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
Thermal alarm command
 187 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
SIGNAL Name
THM TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
NPS2 TRIP
BCD TRIP
CBF RETRIP
CBF TRIP
GEN.TRIP
GEN.TRIP-A
GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
GEN.TRIP-EF
CLP STATE0
CLP STATE1
CLP STATE2
CLP STATE3
GEN.ALARM
OC2-A_INST
OC2-B_INST
OC2-C_INST
EF2_INST
SEF2_INST
OC2_INST
A.M.F.OFF
RELAY FAIL
RELAY FAIL-A
TCSV
CBSV
TC ALARM
ΣI^y ALM
OT ALARM
BO1OP
BO2OP
BO3OP
BO4OP
BO5OP
BO6OP
BO7OP
BO8OP
OC2-A PICKUP
OC2-B PICKUP
OC2-C PICKUP
Contents
Thermal trip command
NPS1 trip command
NPS2 alarm command
BCD trip command
CBF retrip command
CBF back trip command
General Trip command
General Trip command (A Phase)
General Trip command (B Phase)
General Trip command (C Phase)
General Trip command (EF)
Cold Load Protection Stage0
Cold Load Protection Stage1
Cold Load Protection Stage2
Cold Load Protection Stage3
General alarm command
Not in use
Not in use
OC2-A relay element start
OC2-B relay element start
OC2-C relay element start
EF2 relay element start
SEF2 relay element start
OC2 relay element start
Not in use
Automatic monitoring function off
Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
Trip counter alarm
ΣIY alarm
Operate time alarm
Not in use
Not in use
Binary Output1 operated
Binary Output2 operated
Binary Output3 operated
Binary Output4 operated
Binary Output5 operated
Binary Output6 operated
Binary Output7 operated
Binary Output8 operated
OC2-A pick-up
OC2-B pick-up
OC2-C pick-up
 188 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
SIGNAL Name
LCD IND.
LCD IND1.
LCD IND2.
SEF1 PICKUP
SEF2 PICKUP
TESTING
CBF OP-A
CBF OP-B
CBF OP-C
GEN_PICKUP
PROT_COM_ON
IECTST
IECBLK
NORM_LED_ON
TRIP_LED_ON
BI1 COMMAND1
BI2 COMMAND1
BI3 COMMAND1
BI4 COMMAND1
BI5 COMMAND1
BI6 COMMAND1
ARC_BLK_OR
ARC_READY_T
ARC_IN-PROG
ARC_SHOT
ARC_SHOT1
ARC_SHOT2
ARC_SHOT3
ARC_SHOT4
ARC_SHOT5
ARC_FT
ARC_SUCCESS
ARC_COM_ON
ARC_COM_RECV
ETH1_LINKUP
ETH2_LINKUP
Contents
LCD indication (Virtual LED) command
LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command
LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command
SEF1 pick-up
SEF2 pick-up
Testing LED lit output
CBF start or external trip input signal (A phase)
CBF start or external trip input signal (B phase)
CBF start or external trip input signal (C phase)
General start / pick-up
Not in use
Not in use
IEC103 protection command
IEC103 communication test
IEC013 communication block
IN_SERVICE LED ON
TRIP LED ON
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Binary Input signal of BI1 after BI1SNS
Binary Input signal of BI2 after BI2SNS
Binary Input signal of BI3 after BI3SNS
Binary Input signal of BI4 after BI4SNS
Binary Input signal of BI5 after BI5SNS
Binary Input signal of BI6 after BI6SNS
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Auto-Reclosing block
Auto-Reclosing ready condition
Auto-Reclosing in-progress conditon
Auto-Reclosing shot
Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
Auto-Reclosing shot of number2
Auto-Reclosing shot of number3
Auto-Reclosing shot of number4
Auto-Reclosing shot of number5
Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
Auto-Reclosing succeed
IEC103 communication command
Auto-recloser inactivate command received
Not in use
Not in use
Ether port 1 LINK-UP
Ether port 2 LINK-UP
 189 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
SIGNAL Name
IEC61850_RUN
GOOSE_IN_Q1
GOOSE_IN_Q2
GOOSE_IN_Q3
GOOSE_IN_Q4
GOOSE_IN_Q5
GOOSE_IN_Q6
GOOSE_IN_Q7
GOOSE_IN_Q8
GOOSE_IN_Q9
GOOSE_IN_Q10
GOOSE_IN_Q11
GOOSE_IN_Q12
GOOSE_IN_Q13
GOOSE_IN_Q14
GOOSE_IN_Q15
GOOSE_IN_Q16
GOOSE_IN_1
GOOSE_IN_2
GOOSE_IN_3
GOOSE_IN_4
GOOSE_IN_5
GOOSE_IN_6
GOOSE_IN_7
GOOSE_IN_8
GOOSE_IN_9
GOOSE_IN_10
GOOSE_IN_11
GOOSE_IN_12
GOOSE_IN_13
GOOSE_IN_14
GOOSE_IN_15
GOOSE_IN_16
ICD-A
ICD-B
ICD-C
ZPF
ZPR
Local
Remote
CB_OPC_L
Contents
IEC61850 run
Goose quality#1
Goose quality#2
Goose quality#3
Goose quality#4
Goose quality#5
Goose quality#6
Goose quality#7
Goose quality#8
Goose quality#9
Goose quality#10
Goose quality#11
Goose quality#12
Goose quality#13
Goose quality#14
Goose quality#15
Goose quality#16
Goose data#1
Goose data#2
Goose data#3
Goose data#4
Goose data#5
Goose data#6
Goose data#7
Goose data#8
Goose data#9
Goose data#10
Goose data#11
Goose data#12
Goose data#13
Goose data#14
Goose data#15
Goose data#16
Not in use
Inrush current detection (A Phase)
Inrush current detection (B Phase)
Inrush current detection (C Phase)
Residual Power Forward
Residual Power Reverse
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state
Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state
Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open
 190 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
SIGNAL Name
CB_CLC_L
CB_OPC_BI
CB_CLC_BI
CB_OPC_COMM
CB_CLC_COMM
LOCK_BI
LOCK_COMM
CB OPOUT
CB CLOUT
OC1-OR
OC2-OR
OC3-OR
OC4-OR
UC1-OR
UC2-OR
CBF-OR
ICD-OR
IDMT_s1_a
IDMT_s1_b
IDMT_s1_c
IDMT_s1_e
IDMT_s1_se
IDMT_s2_a
IDMT_s2_b
IDMT_s2_c
IDMT_s2_e
IDMT_s2_se
ARC_INIT
ARC_READY
ARC-S1_COND
ARC-S2_COND
ARC-S3_COND
ARC-S4_COND
ARC-S5_COND
TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
Contents
Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close
BI command of Circuit Breaker open
BI command of Circuit Breaker close
Communication command of Circuit Breaker open
Communication command of Circuit Breaker close
BI command of Interlock
Communication command of Interlock
Circuit Breaker Open output
Circuit Breaker Close output
OC1 relay element start
OC2 relay element start
OC3 relay element start
OC4 relay element start
UC1 relay element start
UC2 relay element start
CBF relay element start
ICD relay element start
OC1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
OC1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
OC1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
EF1 integrated value = 0
SEF1 integrated value = 0
OC2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
OC2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
OC2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
EF2 integrated value = 0
SEF2 integrated value = 0
Not in use
ARC initiation command
ARC ready command
Auto-reclosing shot1 condition
Auto-reclosing shot2 condition
Auto-reclosing shot3 condition
Auto-reclosing shot4 condition
Auto-reclosing shot5 condition
Temporary output signal
Temporary output signal
Temporary output signal
Temporary output signal
Temporary output signal
(*) The signal is activated when “definite time element starts” or “inverse time
element operates”.
 191 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix C
Event Record Items
 192 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
LCD indication
GEN.trip
GEN.trip-A
GEN.trip-B
GEN.trip-C
GEN.trip-EF
OC1-A trip
OC1-B trip
OC1-C trip
OC2-A trip
OC2-B trip
OC2-C trip
OC3-A trip
OC3-B trip
OC3-C trip
OC4-A alarm
OC4-B alarm
OC4-C alarm
EF1 trip
EF2 trip
EF3 trip
EF4 alarm
SEF1-S1 trip
SEF1-S2 trip
SEF2 trip
SEF3 trip
SEF4 alarm
UC1-A trip
UC1-B trip
UC1-C trip
UC2-A alarm
UC2-B alarm
UC2-C alarm
THM trip
THM alarm
NPS1 trip
NPS2 alarm
BCD trip
CBF retrip
CBF trip
OC1-A
OC1-B
OC1-C
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Contents
General trip command
General trip command (A Phase)
General trip command (B Phase)
General trip command (C Phase)
General trip command (EF)
OC1 trip command (A Phase)
OC1 trip command (B Phase)
OC1 trip command (C Phase)
OC2 trip command (A Phase)
OC2 trip command (B Phase)
OC2 trip command (C Phase)
OC3 trip command (A Phase)
OC3 trip command (B Phase)
OC3 trip command (C Phase)
OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
EF1 trip command
EF2 trip command
EF3 trip command
EF4 alarm command
SEF1 Stage1 trip command
SEF1 Stage2 trip command
SEF2 trip command
SEF3 trip command
SEF4 alarm command
UC1 trip command (A Phase)
UC1 trip command (B Phase)
UC1 trip command (C Phase)
UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
THM trip command
THM alarm command
NPS1 trip command
NPS2 alarm command
BCD trip command
CBF retrip command
CBF trip command
OC1-A relay element operating
OC1-B relay element operating
OC1-C relay element operating
 193 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
LCD indication
OC2-A
OC2-B
OC2-C
OC3-A
OC3-B
OC3-C
OC4-A
OC4-B
OC4-C
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC1-B
UC1-C
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
NPS1
NPS2
BCD
CLP STATE0
CLP STATE1
CLP STATE2
CLP STATE3
BI1 command
BI2 command
BI3 command
BI4 command
BI5 command
BI6 command
SET. group1
SET. group2
OC1 block
OC2 block
OC3 block
OC4 block
EF1 block
EF2 block
EF3 block
EF4 block
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Contents
OC2-A relay element operating
OC2-B relay element operating
OC2-C relay element operating
OC3-A relay element operating
OC3-B relay element operating
OC3-C relay element operating
OC4-A relay element operating
OC4-B relay element operating
OC4-C relay element operating
EF1 relay element operating
EF2 relay element operating
EF3 relay element operating
EF4 relay element operating
SEF1 relay element operating
SEF2 relay element operating
SEF3 relay element operating
SEF4 relay element operating
UC1-A relay element operating
UC1-B relay element operating
UC1-C relay element operating
UC2-A relay element operating
UC2-B relay element operating
UC2-C relay element operating
NPS1 relay element operating
NPS2 relay element operating
BCD relay element operating
Cold load Protection State
Cold load Protection State
Cold load Protection State
Cold load Protection State
Binary input signal of BI1
Binary input signal of BI2
Binary input signal of BI3
Binary input signal of BI4
Binary input signal of BI5
Binary input signal of BI6
BI command of change active setting group1
BI command of change active setting group2
BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
BI command of OC2 protection scheme block
BI command of OC3 protection scheme block
BI command of OC4 protection scheme block
BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
BI command of EF2 protection scheme block
BI command of EF3 protection scheme block
BI command of EF4 protection scheme block
 194 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
LCD indication
SEF1 block
SEF2 block
SEF3 block
SEF4 block
UC block
THM block
NPS block
BCD block
TC fail
CB CONT OPN
CB CONT CLS
EXT trip-3PH
EXT trip-APH
EXT trip-BPH
EXT trip-CPH
Remote reset
Store record
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Relay fail
Relay fail-A
TC err
CB err
CT err
TP COUNT ALM
ΣI^yA ALM
ΣI^yB ALM
ΣI^yC ALM
OP time ALM
F.record CLR
E.record CLR
D.record CLR
TP COUNT
ΣI^y CLR
Max.DEM CLR
IND.reset
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
127 Data lost
On
128
129
130
131
132
133
On
On
On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Sys.Set
Rly.Set
Grp.Set
OC1-A INST
OC1-B INST
OC1-C INST
Contents
BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF2 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF3 protection scheme block
BI command of SEF4 protection scheme block
BI command of UC protection scheme block
BI command of THM protection scheme block
BI command of NPS protection scheme block
BI command of BCD protection scheme block
BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
BI command of CB N/O contact
BI command of CB N/C contact
BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
BI command of External trip (A Phase)
BI command of External trip (B Phase)
BI command of External trip (C Phase)
BI command of Remote reset
BI command of Store Disturbance Record
BI command of Alarm1
BI command of Alarm2
BI command of Alarm3
BI command of Alarm4
Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
CT circuit supervision failure
Trip counter alarm
ΣIY A-Phase alarm
ΣIY B-Phase alarm
ΣIY C-Phase alarm
Operate time alarm
Clear Fault records
Clear Event records
Clear Disturbance records
Clear Trip counter
Clear ΣIY counter
Clear Max. demand (Imax)
Reset the indication of Trip mode, Alarm etc.
Record and time data lost by power supply off
for a long time
System setting change command
Relay setting change command
Group setting change command
OC1-A relay element start
OC1-B relay element start
OC1-C relay element start
 195 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No.
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
LCD indication
OC2-A INST
OC2-B INST
OC2-C INST
EF1 INST
EF2 INST
SEF1 INST
SEF2 INST
Local
Remote
CB OPC_L
CB CLC_L
CB OPC_BI
CB CLC_BI
CB OPC_COMM
CB CLC_COMM
LOCK_BI
LOCK_COMM
CB OPOUT
CB CLOUT
BO1 operate
BO2 operate
BO3 operate
BO4 operate
BO5 operate
BO6 operate
BO7 operate
BO8 operate
ARC READY
ARC INIT
MANUAL CLS
ARC NO_ACT
ARC BLOCK
ARC READY_T
ARC IN-PROG
ARC_SHOT
ARC_SHOT1
ARC_SHOT2
ARC_SHOT3
ARC_SHOT4
ARC_SHOT5
ARC FAIL
ARC SUCCESS
AR_COUNT CLR
ARC_COM RECV
GEN.pick-up
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off/On
Contents
OC2-A relay element start
OC2-B relay element start
OC2-C relay element start
EF1 relay element start
EF2 relay element start
SEF1 relay element start
SEF2 relay element start
CB Control hierarchy Local state
CB Control hierarchy Remote state
Local SW command of CB Open
Local SW command of CB Close
BI command of CB Open
BI command of CB Close
Communication command of CB Open
Communication command of CB Close
BI command of Interlock
Communication command of Intrelock
CB Open Output
CB Close Output
BO1 operating
BO2 operating
BO3 operating
BO4 operating
BO5 operating
BO6 operating
BO7 operating
BO8 operating
ARC initiation command
ARC ready command
ARC Manual close command
ARC not applied command
Auto-Reclosing block
Auto-Reclosing ready condition
Auto-Reclosing in-progress condition
Auto-Reclosing shot
Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
Auto-Reclosing shot of number2
Auto-Reclosing shot of number3
Auto-Reclosing shot of number4
Auto-Reclosing shot of number5
Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
Auto-Reclosing succeed
ARC Counter CLR
Auto-recloser inactivate command received
General start/pick-up command
 196 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting List
 197 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Relay
Model
BO
No.
Terminal
No.
Signal
Name
Contents
GRE110 BO1
-400 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
GRE110 BO1
-401 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
GRE110 BO1
-420 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
NON
GENERAL TRIP
GRE110 BO3
-820 BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
GRE110 BO1
-421 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3-4
NON
GENERAL TRIP
GRE110 BO3
-821 BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
NON
GENERAL TRIP
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
 198 
Setting
Signal No.
Logic
(OR:0,
AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1
DW:2 Latch:3)
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Relay
Model
GRE110
-402
GRE110
-422
BO
No.
Terminal
No.
Signal
Name
BO1
BO2
TB3
1-2
3-4
NON
GENERAL TRIP
BO3
BO4
R.F.
Contents
Setting
Signal No.
Logic
(OR:0,
AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1
Latch:2)
0
141
0
0
1
1
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
150
0
0
0
1
1
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
TB1
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
NON
NON
NON
NON
Off
Off
Off
Off
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
BO1
BO2
TB3
1-2
3-4
NON
GENERAL TRIP
0
141
0
0
1
1
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
150
0
0
0
1
1
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
TB1
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
NON
NON
NON
NON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
 199 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix E
Relay Menu Tree
 200 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MAIN MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Control
Test
/1 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/2 Fault
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
/3 Fault
#1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.031
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Event
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
/3 Event
16/Jul/2010
Ext. trip A On
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Disturbance
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.3.
/3 Disturbance
#1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.401
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
 201 
/4 Fault #1
16/Jul/2010
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter
View counter
Clear Trips
Clear Trips A
Clear Trips B
Clear Trips C
Clear Σ I^yA
Clear Σ I^yB
Clear Σ I^yC
Clear ARCs
Refer to Section
4.2.3.4.
/3 Counter
Trips *****
TripsA *****
TripsB *****
TripsC *****
Σ I^yA ******E6
Σ I^yB ******E6
Σ I^yC ******E6
ARCs
*****
Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear ARCs?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
 202 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1
/1 Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
/2 Metering
la **.** kA
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 Binary I/O
IP [0000 0000]
/2 Ry element
A OC1-2[00 ]
/2 16/Jul/2010
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Refer to Section 4.2.5
/2 Version
Relay type
Software
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
GRE110-401A-10
-10
■Software
GS1EM1-01-*
■PLC data
/3 Addr.
Addr.
/3 Switch
a-1, b-1
 203 
*
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Record
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/3 Event
BI1 comm.
N/O/R/B
:
3
/3 Disturbace
Time/Starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/4 Time/starter
Time1
2.0s
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1
51
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone
/3 Metering
/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
Group2
/3 Time zone.
/3 Time sync.
/3 Common
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/4 Parameter
Line name
CT ratio
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗
/5 CT ratio
OCCT
400
EFCT
200
 204 
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Alarm set
TCALM 10000
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Application
/5 Scheme sw
Application
PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/6 PF prot.
/6 EF prot.
/4 ARC
Scheme sw
ARC element
/6 SEF prot.
/6 Misc. prot.
/5 Prot.element
PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/6 EF prot.
EF1
0.30A
/6 SEF prot.
SE1
0.100A
/3 Group2
Parameter
/2 Binary I/P
BI STATUS
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
/6 PF prot.
OC1
1.00A
/3 BI STATUS
/3 BI1
Timers
Functions
/6 Misc. prot.
THM
1.00A
/4 Timers
BI1PUD 0.00s
/4 Functions
/3 BI6
Timers
Functions
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Alarm∗ Text
a-1 b-1
 205 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, DL
151, 0, 0, 0
BO8 OR , Lat
141, 1, 2, 3
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/2 Control
/2 Frequency
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
/3 LED
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
I,O
: Confirmation trap
Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.
/4 LED2
BIT1
Set.(change)
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
Set.(change)
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890←
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
I,O
: Password trap
Set.(change)
Input
[_ ]
1234567890←
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3.
/4 LED1
BIT1
ABCDEFG
_
ABCDEFG
/3 Addr.
Addr
/3 Switch
RS485
a-1 b-2
 206 
Refer to Section
4.2.6.2.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2
/2 Record
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5.
/3 Event
BI1 comm.
BI1 comm.
N/O/R/B
:
:
3 _
/4 Time/starter
/3 Disturbance
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/4 Scheme sw
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Copy gp.
/3 Metering
Display
/3 Time sync.
Time sync.
/3 Time zone
GMT
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
/4 Common
AOLED
a-1 b-2
c-2
d-2
 207 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1
b-2
c-2
d-2
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/5 Parameter
Line name
CT ratio
_
ABCDEFG
/6 CT ratio
OCEFCT
/5 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Scheme sw
Application
PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/5 ARC
Scheme sw
ARC element
/7 Application
/7 PF prot.
/7 EF prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/6 Prot.element
PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/7 PF prot.
/7 EF prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/4 Group2
Parameter
a-1, b-2
c-2
 208 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2 c-2
/3 Copy A to B
A
_
B
_
/2 Binary I/P
BI Status
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Refer to Section
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 LED
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
CB CLOSED
a-1
b-2
c-3
/3 BI Status
BITHR1
/3 BI1
Timers
Functions
/4 Timers
/4 Functions
/3 BI6
Timers
Functions
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
ABCDEFG
Alarm∗ Text
/3 BO1
Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Logic/Reset
/4 Functions
/3 BO4
Logic/Reset
Functions
Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
/4 LED1
Logic/Reset
Functions
LED Color
/4 LED6
Logic/Reset
Functions
LED Color
/4 CB CLOSED
LED Color
 209 
/5 Logic/Reset
/5 Functions
/5 LED Color
/5 LED Color
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1
b-2
c-3
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
/4 IND1
Reset
Functions
/5 Reset
/5 Functions
/2 Control
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/2 Frequency
: Password trap
Control
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
/1 Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local/Remote
CB OPEN/CLOSE
Refer to Section 4.2.7
/1 Test
Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Refer to Section 4.2.8.
Control
Input
[_ ]
1234567890←
Refer to Section
4.2.7.2.
Test
Input
[_ ]
1234567890←
Refer to Section
4.2.8.2.
Test
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890←
: Password trap
Test
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
/2 Switch
A.M.F.
1 _
Off/On
CLPTST
0
Off/S0/S3
IECTST
0
Off/On
/2 Binary O/P
Control
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890←
Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1
0 _
Disable/Enable
BO4
0
Disable/Enable
 210 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix F
Case Outline
 211 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Case Outline for model 400,401,420, 421, 820 and 821
 212 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Case Outline for model 402 and 422
 213 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix G
Typical External Connection
 214 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
GRE110-400A
TB1
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ie
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
*
TRIP
COIL
BO3
5
*
6
CLOSE
COIL
N
BO4
7
8
Relay fail BO5
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Available for
TCS
9
10
11
12
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
FG
(CB CLOSED)
FRONT PANEL
P
Control
Power
Available for
TCS
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
(CB OPEN)
USB Type B
N.C.
Rear PANEL
COM
N
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
RS485
21
A+ 23
B- 24
RJ45 N.C.
Relay fail
indicator
N
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 - 400A
 215 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
GRE110-401A
TB1
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ie
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
P
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
5
*
6
AUXILIARY
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
BO4
7
8
Relay fail BO5
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
FG
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Control
Power
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
BI3-6
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
RS485
COM
21
A+ 23
B- 24
RJ45 N.C.
Relay fail
indicator
N
N
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 401A
 216 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
GRE110-420A
Core
balance
CT
P
N
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
TRIP
COIL
BO3
AUXILIARY
*
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO4
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
7
8
Relay fail R.F.
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Available for
TCS
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
FG
(CB CLOSED)
FRONT PANEL
Available for
TCS
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
(CB OPEN)
Rear PANEL
N.C.
N
13
14
BI2
15
16
RS485
COM
Relay fail
indicator
BI1
17
18
N.C. 19
20
22
USB Type B
RJ45
Control
Power
TB2
TB1
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
21
A+ 23
B- 24
N
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 420A
 217 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
GRE110-421A
TB1
Core
balance
CT
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO4
*
TRIP
COIL
BO3
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
7
8
Relay fail BO5
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
RS485
COM
21
A+ 23
B- 24
N.C.
Relay fail
indicator
N
BI3-6
AUXILIARY
RJ45
P
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
FG
USB Type B
Control
Power
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
N
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 421A
 218 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
P
GRE110-402A
TB2
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ie
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
TB3
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
5
*
6
AUXILIARY
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
BO4
7
8
Relay fail R.F.
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
FG
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Control
Power
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
N
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
BI3-6
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
Relay fail
indicator
RS485
COM
N
21
COM
A+
B-
A+ 23
B- 24
RJ45
N.C.
TB1
AUXILIARY
A+
BCOM
Control
Power
BO5
1
2
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
100BASE-TX
1port / 2port
BO6
3
4
Optional Communication
Port ***
BO7
*
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO8
7
8
9
N.C. 10
11
12
*
100BASE-FX
1port / 2port
*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 402A
 219 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
Control
Power
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
P
GRE110-422A
TB3
TB2
Core
balance
CT
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
*
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO4
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
7
8
Relay fail R.F.
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
FG
9
10
11
12
N.C.
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
USB Type B
BO1
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
N
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
BI3-6
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
Relay fail
indicator
RS485
COM
N
21
COM
A+
B-
A+ 23
B- 24
RJ45
N.C.
TB1
AUXILIARY
A+
BCOM
Control
Power
BO5
1
2
AUXILIARY
Optional Communication
Port ***
100BASE-TX
1port / 2port
BO6
3
4
AUXILIARY
BO7
*
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO8
7
8
9
N.C. 10
11
12
*
100BASE-FX
1port / 2port
*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 422A
 220 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
GRE110-821A
TB1
Core
balance
CT
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ic
4
5
Vo
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
5
*
6
AUXILIARY
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
BO4
7
8
Relay fail R.F.
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
RS485
COM
21
A+ 23
B- 24
N.C.
Relay fail
indicator
N
BI3-6
AUXILIARY
RJ45
P
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
FG
USB Type B
Control
Power
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
N
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3-4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 821A
 221 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
GRE110-401A
TB1
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ie
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
P
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
5
*
6
AUXILIARY
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
BO4
7
8
Relay fail BO5
DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
AUXILIARY
FG
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
USB Type B
Control
Power
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
BI3-6
17
18
19
20
22
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
Relay fail
indicator
N
RS485
COM
N
21
A+ 23
B- 24
RJ45 N.C.
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3-4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 401A 2CT application
 222 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
A
B
C
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
GRE110-420A
TB1
Core
balance
CT
1 **
Ia
2
3 **
Ib
4
5 **
Ic
6
7 **
Ise
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
SW
CB OPEN/TRIP
BO1
1
2
BO2
3
4
AUXILIARY
TRIP
COIL
BO3
*
5
6
AUXILIARY
BO4
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
7
8
Relay fail R.F.
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
Available for
TCS
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
FG
(CB CLOSED)
Available for
TCS
FRONT PANEL
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
(CB OPEN)
Relay fail
indicator
N
BI1
13
14
BI2
15
16
N
17
18
N.C. 19
20
22
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
RS485
COM
RJ45
P
Control
Power
21
A+ 23
B- 24
N.C.
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3-4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 420A 2CT application
 223 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 224 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. Relay Identification
Date:
Relay type
Serial Number
Frequency
AC current
Supply voltage
Active setting group
Password
Setting
Control
Test
2. Line parameter
CT ratio
OC:
EF:
SEF:
3. Contacts setting
TB2
BO1 Terminal 1-2
(For model type 402 or 422, the terminal block number is TB3 )
BO2 Terminal 3-4
BO3 Terminal 5-6
BO4 Terminal 7-8
BI1
Terminal 13-14
BI2
Terminal 15-16
BI3
Terminal 17-22
BI4
Terminal 18-22
BI5
Terminal 19-22
BI6
Terminal 20-22
TB1
(Only for model type 402 or 422)
BO5 Terminal 1-2
BO6 Terminal 3-4
BO7 Terminal 5-6
BO8 Terminal 7-8
 225 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. Relay setting sheet
Menu
Password
Description
Communi
-cation
Name
Range
Password(Set)
0000 – 9999
Password(Ctlr)
0000 – 9999
Password(Test)
0000 – 9999
Password for Test
Plant name
Specified by user
Description
Specified by user
Modbu
s
1 - 247
IEC
0 - 254
RS485BR
9.6 / 19.2
EtherP
RS485P
Off / IEC61850
Off / MOD / IEC103
Plant name
Memorandum
for user
Relay ID No.
for Modbus
Relay ID No.
for IEC
Baud rate
for Modbus
Ethernet Protocol
IECNFI
1.2 / 2.4
IECNFV
1.2 / 2.4
IECBLK
Normal/Blocked
IECB1
0 - 312
IECB2
0 - 312
IECB3
0 - 312
IECB4
0 - 312
IECGT
IECAT
IECBT
IECCT
IECE1
IECE2
IECE3
IECE4
IECE5
IECE6
IECE7
IECE8
IECI1
IECI2
IECI3
IECI4
IECI5
IECI6
IECI7
IECI8
0-8
0-8
0-8
0-8
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
 226 
Contents
Password for
Setting change
Password for
Control
Switch for
communications
Switch for
communications
Switch for
communications
IEC user
specified signal 1
IEC user
specified signal 2
IEC user
specified signal 3
IEC user
specified signal 4
IEC General Trip
IEC Trip A phase
IEC Trip B phase
IEC Trip C phase
IEC user event 1
IEC user event 2
IEC user event 3
IEC user event 4
IEC user event 5
IEC user event 6
IEC user event 7
IEC user event 8
IEC user INF 1
IEC user INF 2
IEC user INF 3
IEC user INF 4
IEC user INF 5
IEC user INF 6
IEC user INF 7
IEC user INF 8
Default
None
(0000)
None
(0000)
None
(0000)
－
－
1
1
19.2
Off
MOD(1)
2.4(1)
2.4(1)
Normal(0)
1
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
IECGI1
IECGI2
IECGI3
IECGI4
IECGI5
IECGI6
IECGI7
IECGI8
61850BLK
TSTMOD
GSECHK
PINGCHK
IP1-1
IP1-2
IP1-3
IP1-4
SM1-1
SM1-2
SM1-3
SM1-4
GW1-1
GW1-2
GW1-3
GW1-4
SI1-1
SI1-2
SI1-3
SI1-4
PG1-1
PG1-2
PG1-3
PG1-4
SMODE
DEADT
GOINT
BI1 comm.
BI2 comm.
Event
Record
BI3 comm.
BI4 comm.
BI5 comm.
BI6 comm.
Range
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
Normal / Blocked
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0 - 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 - 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0 – 254
0-1
1-32400 s
1-60 s
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
Time1
0.1 – 4.9 s
Disturbance
Time2
Record
0.1 – 4.9 s
OC
0.10 – 150.00 A
 227 
Contents
IEC event type setting 1
IEC event type setting 2
IEC event type setting 3
IEC event type setting 4
IEC event type setting 5
IEC event type setting 6
IEC event type setting 7
IEC event type setting 8
IEC61850 Block
IEC61850 test mode
Ping check
Ping check
IP address Ethernet port 1
IP address Ethernet port 1
IP address Ethernet port 1
IP address Ethernet port 1
Subnet mask Eth port 1
Subnet mask Eth port 1
Subnet mask Eth port 1
Subnet mask Eth port 1
Default gate way of Eth
Default gate way of Eth
Default gate way of Eth
Default gate way of Eth
SNTP server address
SNTP server address
SNTP server address
SNTP server address
Ping check address
Ping check address
Ping check address
Ping check address
Default
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
No(0)
BI1 command
trigger
BI2 command
trigger
BI3 command
trigger
BI4 command
trigger
BI5 command
trigger
BI6 command
trigger
Recording period
before fault
Recording period
after fault
OC element
for disturbance
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
0.3
3.0
2.00
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
Range
EF
0.10 – 100.00 A
SEF
0.025 – 2.500 A
NPS
0.10 – 10.00 A
Trip
BI
OC
EF
SEF
NPS
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
Disturbance
SIG8
Record
SIG9
SIG10
SIG11
SIG12
SIG13
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16…30
SIG31
SIG32
TCSPEN
Counter
Status
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
Contents
EF element
for disturbance
SEF element
for disturbance
NPS element
for disturbance
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Off / On / Opt-On
Trip Circuit
Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker
State Monitoring
Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm
Enable
ΣIy Alarm Enable
Operate Time
Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm
Threshold
ΣIy Alarm
Threshold
Y value
Operate Time
Alarm Threshold
Metering
CBSMEN
Off / On
TCAEN
Off / On
ΣIyALM
Off / On
OPTAEN
Off / On
TCALM
1 – 10000
ΣIyALM
10 – 10000 E6
YVALUE
1.0 – 2.0
OPTALM
100 – 5000 ms
Display
Pri / Sec / Pri-A
Off / BI / Modbus /
Time
103 / SNTP
Time sync.
 228 
Default
0.60
--(0.200)
0.40
On
On
On
On
--(Off)
On
51
52
53
63
102
103
104
117
141
142
143
144
145
0
0
0
0
0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
10000
10000
2.0
1000
Pri
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
BI1SNS
BI1SGS
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
SEF1BLK
SEF2BLK
SEF3BLK
SEF4BLK
UCBLK
THMBLK
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
Range
12 / 24 / 48 or
24 / 48 /110 or
48 / 110 /220
24 / 48 or
48 / 110 or
110 / 220
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 300.00
Norm / Inv
Off / 1 / 2
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
TCFALM
Off / On
CBOPN
Off / On
CBCLS
Off / On
EXT3PH
Off / On
EXTAPH
Off / On
EXTBPH
Off / On
EXTCPH
Off / On
RMTRST
SYNCLK
Off / On
Off / On
STORCD
Off / On
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
RMTOPN
Off / On
BITHR1
BITHR2
Binary
Input
BI1
 229 
Contents
BI1,BI2 Threshold
Default
1(24 or 48
or 110)
BI3-BI6 Threshold
0(24 or 48
or 110)
BI1 Pick-up delay
BI1 Drop-off delay
BI1 Trigger
BI1 Settings Group
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
UC Block
THM Block
NPS Block
BCD Block
Trip Circuit
Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker
Open
Circuit Breaker
Closed
External Trip
– 3Phase
External Trip
– A Phase
External Trip
– B Phase
External Trip
– C Phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance
Record
Alarm screen 1
Alarm screen 2
Alarm screen 3
Alarm screen 4
Remote CB
Open Control
0.00
0.00
Norm
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
-- (Off)
-- (Off)
-- (Off)
-- (Off)
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
RMTCLS
Off / On
CNTLCK
Off / On
ARCBLK
Off / On
ARCNAT
Off / On
ARCMCL
Off / On
BI2PUD
Range
0.00 – 300.00
BI2DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI2SNS
Norm / Inv
BI2SGS
Off / 1 / 2
Name
BI2
The following items are same as BI1
BI3PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI3
BI3DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI3SNS
Norm / Inv
BI3SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI4PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI4
Binary
Input
BI4DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI4SNS
Norm / Inv
BI4SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI5PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI5
BI5DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI5SNS
Norm / Inv
BI5SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI6PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI6
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
BI6DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI6SNS
Norm / Inv
BI6SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
 230 
Remote CB
Close Control
Interlock input
Off
ARC scheme block
command
ARC not applied
command
ARC Manual close
command
Off
Contents
BI2 Pick-up delay
BI2 Drop-off
delay
BI2 Trigger
BI2 Settings
Group
Default
0.00
0.00
BI3 Pick-up delay
BI3 Drop-off
delay
BI3 Trigger
BI3 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI4 Pick-up delay
BI4 Drop-off
delay
BI4 Trigger
BI4 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI5 Pick-up delay
BI5 Drop-off
delay
BI5 Trigger
BI5 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI6 Pick-up delay
BI6 Drop-off
delay
BI6 Trigger
BI6 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Off
Off
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
BO1
Binary
Output
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
Configurable
LED
Range
OR / AND
Ins / DI / Dw / Lat
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0.00 – 10.00 s
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Same as BO1
Same as BO1
Same as BO1
Same as BO1 (for model 4x2)
Same as BO1 (for model 4x2)
Same as BO1 (for model 4x2)
Same as BO1
Logic
OR / AND
Reset
Inst / Latch
In #1
0 - 312
In #2
0 - 312
In #3
0 - 312
In #4
0 - 312
Color
R/G/Y
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
CB CLOSED Color
R/G/Y
IND1 Reset
Inst / Latch
IND2 Reset
Inst / Latch
IND1
IND2
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
Same as IND1
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
0 - 312
 231 
Contents
Logic Gate Type
Reset Operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay / Pulse width
Default
OR
DI
0
0
0
0
0.20
Logic Gate Type
Reset Operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
LED Color
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
R
CB CLOSED LED
Color
IND1 Reset
operation
IND2 Reset
operation
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
R
Inst
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Active
group /
Common
Name
Active gp.
Range
1-2
AOLED
Off / On
Control
Interlock
Disable / Enable
Disable / Enable
Control Hierarchy
Local / Remote
Frequency
Line name
50Hz / 60Hz
Specified by user
OCCT
1 – 20000
EFCT
1 – 20000
SEFCT
1 – 20000
VEVT
1 – 20000
SVCNT
ALM&BLK / ALM
AC input imbalance
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
OC1 Enable
OC1 Delay Type
(if OC1EN=On)
OC1 IEC
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC1=IEC)
OC1 IEEE
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC1=IEEE)
OC1 US
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC1=US)
OC1 Reset
characteristic.
(if MOC1=
IEEE,US or C)
OC1 2f Block
Enable
OC1EN
MOC1
Protection
MOC1C
- IEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MOC1CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
OC
MOC1CUS
CO2 / CO8
OC1R
DEF / DEP
OC1-2F
NA / Block
 232 
Contents
Active setting group
ALARM LED
lighting control
at alarm output
Control Enable
Interlock Enable
Control Hierarchy
(if Control = Enable)
Frequency
Line name
CT ratio of
Phase CT
CT ratio of
Earth Fault CT
CT ratio of
Sensitive
Earth Fault CT
VT ratio for
Sensitive
Earth Fault function
Default
1
On
Enable
Disable
-- (Local)
50Hz
－
400
200
-- (400)
-- (1)
ALM&
BLK
On
D
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
OC2EN
MOC2
OC
UC
MOC2C
- IEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MOC2CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
MOC2CUS
CO2 / CO8
OC2R
DEF / DEP
OC2-2F
OC3EN
OC3-2F
OC4EN
NA / Block
Off / On
NA / Block
Off / On
OC4-2F
NA / Block
UC1EN
UC2EN
EF1EN
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
MEF1
Protection
EF
Range
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
MEF1CIEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MEF1CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
MEF1CUS
CO2 / CO8
EF1R
DEF / DEP
EF1-2F
EF2EN
NA / Block
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
MEF2
MEF2CIEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MEF2CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
MEF2CUS
CO2 / CO8
 233 
Contents
OC2 Enable
OC2 Delay Type
(if OC2EN=On)
OC2 IEC
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC2=IEC)
OC2 IEEE
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC2=IEEE)
OC2 US
Inverse Curve Type
(if MOC2=US)
OC2 Reset
characteristic.
(if MOC2=IEEE,US or C)
OC2 2f Block Enable
OC3 Enable
OC3 2f Block Enable
OC4 Enable
OC4 2f Block
Enable
UC1 Enable
UC2 Enable
EF1 Enable
EF1 Delay Type
(if EF1EN=On)
EF1 IEC Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF1=IEC)
EF1 IEEE Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF1=IEEE)
EF1 US Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF1=US)
EF1 Reset
Characteristic.
(if MEF1=IEEE,US or C)
EF1 2f Block Enable
EF2 Enable
EF2 Delay Type
(if EF2EN=On)
EF2 IEC Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF2=IEC)
EF2 IEEE Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF2=IEEE)
EF2 US Inverse
Curve Type
(if MEF2=US)
Default
Off
D
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
NA
On
NA
Off
Off
On
D
NI
MI
CO2
DEF
NA
Off
D
NI
MI
CO2
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
EF
Range
EF2R
DEF / DEP
EF2-2F
EF3EN
EF3-2F
EF4EN
EF4-2F
SE1EN
NA / Block
Off / On
NA / Block
Off / On
NA / Block
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
FWD / REV / NON
MSE1
SE1-DIR
Protection
MSE1CIEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MSE1CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
MSE1CUS
CO2 / CO8
SE1R
DEF / DEP
SE1S2
Off / On
SE1-2F
SE2EN
NA / Block
Off / On
D / IEC / IEEE /
US / C
FWD / REV / NON
SEF
MSE2
SE2-DIR
MSE2CIEC
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MSE2CIEEE
MI / VI / EI
MSE2CUS
CO2 / CO8
 234 
Contents
EF2 Reset
Characteristic.
(if MEF1=
IEEE,US or C)
EF2 2f Block Enable
EF3 Enable
EF3 2f Block Enable
EF4 Enable
EF4 2f Block Enable
SEF1 Enable
SEF1 Delay Type
(if SE1EN=On)
SEF1 Directtional
SEF1 IEC Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE1=IEC)
SEF1 IEEE Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE1=IEEE)
SEF1 US Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE1=US)
SEF1 Reset
Characteristic.
(if MSE1= IEEE,US or C)
SEF1 Stage2
Timer Enable
(if SE1EN=On)
SEF1 2f Block Enable
SEF2 Enable
SEF2 Delay Type
(if SE2EN=On)
SEF2 Directtional
SEF2 IEC Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE2=IEC)
SEF2 IEEE Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE2=IEEE)
SEF2 US Inverse
Curve Type
(if MSE1=US)
Default
DEF
NA
Off
NA
On
NA
-- (Off)
-- (D)
-- (NON)
-- (NI)
-- (MI)
-- (CO2)
-- (DEF)
-- (Off)
-- (NA)
-- (Off)
-- (D)
-- (NON)
-- (NI)
-- (MI)
-- (CO2)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
Range
SE2R
SEF
SE2-2F
SE3EN
SE3-2F
SE3-DIR
SE4EN
SE4-2F
SE4-DIR
ZPEN
THM
NPS
BCD
CBF
THMEN
THMAEN
NPS1EN
NPS1-2F
NPS2EN
NPS2-2F
BCDEN
BCD-2F
BTC
RTC
CLSG
Protection
CLP
CLDOEN
ARCEN
ARC-NUM
OC1-INIT
OC1-TP1
OC1-TP2
OC1-TP3
OC1-TP4
OC1-TP5
OC1-TP6
ARC
OC2-INIT
OC2-TP1
OC2-TP2
OC2-TP3
OC2-TP4
OC2-TP5
OC2-TP6
OC3-INIT
OC3-TP1
OC3-TP2
OC3-TP3
Contents
SEF2 Reset
Characteristic.
DEF / DEP
(if MSE2=IEEE,US or C)
NA / Block
SEF2 2f Block Enable
Off / On
SEF3 Enable
NA / Block
SEF3 2f Block Enable
FWD / REV / NON SEF1 Directtional
Off / On
SEF4 Enable
NA / Block
SEF4 2f Block Enable
FWD / REV / NON SEF1 Directtional
Residual Power block
Off / On
Enable
Thermal Overload
Off / On
Enable
Off / On
Thermal Alarm Enable
Off / On
NPS1 Enable
NA / Block
NPS1 2f Block Enable
Off / On
NPS2 Enable
NA / Block
NPS2 2f Block Enable
Broken conductor
Off / On
Enable
NA / Block
BCD 2f Block Enable
Off / On
Back-Trip Control
Off / DIR / OC
Re-trip Control
Cold Load
Off / 1 /2
settings group
Cold Load
Off / On
drop-off Enable
Off / On
Autoreclosing Enable.
S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / Reclosing shot max.
S5
number
Autoreclosing initiation by
NA / On / Block
OC1 enable
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
NA / On / Block
OC2 enable
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
NA / On / Block
OC3 enable
Off -/Inst / Set
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
Off -/Inst / Set
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
 235 
Default
-- (DEF)
-- (NA)
-- (Off)
-- (NA)
-- (NON)
-- (Off)
-- (NA)
-- (NON)
-- (Off)
Off
Off
Off
NA
Off
NA
Off
NA
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
S1
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OC3-TP4
OC3-TP5
OC3-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
OC4-INIT
NA / On / Block
OC4-TP1
OC4-TP2
OC4-TP3
OC4-TP4
OC4-TP5
OC4-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
EF1-INIT
NA / On / Block
EF1-TP1
EF1-TP2
EF1-TP3
EF1-TP4
EF1-TP5
EF1-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
EF2-INIT
NA / On / Block
EF2-TP1
EF2-TP2
EF2-TP3
EF2-TP4
EF2-TP5
EF2-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
EF3-INIT
NA / On / Block
EF3-TP1
EF3-TP2
EF3-TP3
EF3-TP4
EF3-TP5
EF3-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
EF4-INIT
NA / On / Block
EF4-TP1
EF4-TP2
EF4-TP3
EF4-TP4
EF4-TP5
EF4-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
SE1-INIT
NA / On / Block
SE1-TP1
SE1-TP2
SE1-TP3
SE1-TP4
SE1-TP5
SE1-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
SE2-INIT
NA / On / Block
SE2-TP1
Off -/Inst / Set
 236 
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
OC4 enable
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
EF1 enable
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
EF2 enable
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
EF3 enable
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
EF4 enable
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
SEF1 enable
SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF1 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
SEF2 enable
SEF2 trip mode of 1st trip
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
-- (NA)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (NA)
-- (Set)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SE2-TP2
SE2-TP3
SE2-TP4
SE2-TP5
SE2-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
SE3-INIT
NA / On / Block
SE3-TP1
SE3-TP2
SE3-TP3
SE3-TP4
SE3-TP5
SE3-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
SE4-INIT
NA / On / Block
SE4-TP1
SE4-TP2
SE4-TP3
SE4-TP4
SE4-TP5
SE4-TP6
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
Off -/Inst / Set
EXT-INIT
NA / On / Block
ARCEN
Off / On
 237 
SEF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF2 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF2 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
SEF3 enable
SEF3 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF3 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF3 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
SEF4 enable
SEF4 trip mode of 1st trip
SEF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
SEF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
SEF4 trip mode of 4th trip
SEF4 trip mode of 5th trip
SEF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by
External Trip Command
enable
Autoreclosing Enable.
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (NA)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (NA)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
-- (Set)
NA
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
OC
Protection
UC
OC1
Range
0.10 – 25.00 A
TOC1
0.010 – 1.500
TOC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TOC1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TOC1RM
0.010 – 1.500
OC2
0.10 – 25.00 A
TOC2
0.010 – 1.500 s
TOC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TOC2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TOC2RM
0.010 – 1.500
OC3
0.10 – 150.00 A
TOC3
0.00 – 300.00 s
OC4
0.10 – 150.00 A
TOC4
0.00 – 300.00 s
OC1-k
OC1-α
OC1-C
OC1-kr
OC1-β
OC2-k
OC2-α
OC2-C
OC2-kr
OC2-β
UC1
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.10 – 10.0 A
TUC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
UC2
0.10 – 10.00 A
TUC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
 238 
Contents
OC1 Threshold
OC1
Time multiplier
(if MOC1≠D)
OC1 Definite
time setting.
(if MOC1=D)
OC1 Definite
time reset delay
(if OC1R=DEF)
OC1 Dependent
time reset delay
(if OC1R=DEP)
OC2 Threshold
OC2 Definite
time setting.
OC2 Definite
time setting.
(if MOC2=D)
OC2 Definite
time reset delay
(if OC2R=DEF)
OC2 Dependent
time reset delay
(if OC2R=DEP)
OC3 Threshold
OC3 Definite
time setting.
OC4 Threshold
OC4 Definite
time setting.
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting.
(if MOC1=C)
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting.
(if MOC2=C)
UC1 Threshold
UC1 Definite time
Setting
UC2 Threshold
UC2 Definite time
Setting
Default
1.00A
1.000
1.00s
0.0s
1.000
5.00A
1.000s
0.00s
0.0s
1.000
10.00A
0.00s
10.00A
0.00s
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
0.40A
0.00s
0.20A
0.00s
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
EF
Protection
SEF
EF1
Range
0.05 – 25.00 A
TEF1
0.010 – 1.500
TEF1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TEF1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TEF1RM
0.010 – 1.500
EF1-k
EF1-α
EF1-C
EF1-kr
EF1-β
EF2
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.05 – 25.00 A
TEF2
0.010 – 1.500
TEF2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TEF2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TEF2RM
0.010 – 1.500
EF2-k
EF2-α
EF2-C
EF2-kr
EF2-β
EF3
TEF3
EF4
TEF4
SEθ
SEV
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.05 – 100.00 A
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.05 – 100.00 A
0.00 – 300.00 s
-95 – 95deg
0.5 – 100.0V
TSE1
0.010 – 1.500
TSE1
0.00 – 300.0 s
TSE1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TSE1RM
0.010 – 1.500
TSE1S2
0.00 – 300.00 s
 239 
Contents
EF1 Threshold
EF1 Time multiplier
(if MEF1≠D)
EF1 Definite time
(if MOC1=D)
EF1 Definite time
reset delay
(if EF1R=DEF)
EF1 Dependent
time reset time
(if EF1R=DEP)
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting
(if MEF1=C)
EF1 Threshold
EF2 Time multiplier
(if MEF2≠D)
EF2 Definite time
(if MOC2=D)
EF2 Definite time
reset delay
(if EF2R=DEF)
EF1 Dependent
time reset time
(if EF2R=DEP)
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting
(if MEF2=C)
EF3 Threshold
EF3 Definite time
EF4 Threshold
EF4 Definite time
SEF Characteristic angle
SEF ZPS voltage level
SEF1 Time multiplier
(if MSE1≠D)
SEF1 Definite time
(if MSE1=D)
SEF1 Definite
time reset delay
(if SE1R=DEF)
SEF1 Dependent
time reset time
(if SE1R=DEP)
SEF1 Stage2
Timer
Default
0.30A
1.000
1.00s
0.0s
1.000
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
3.00A
1.000
0.00s
0.0s
1.000
0.14
0.02
0.000
2.00
2.00
5.00A
0.00s
5.00A
0.00s
-- (0)
-- (3.0)
-- (1.000)
-- (1.00)
-- (0.0)
-- (1.000)
-- (0.00)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
SEF
Protection
THM
NPS
SE1-k
SE1-α
SE1-C
SE1-kr
SE1-β
SE2
Range
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.001 – 0.250 A
TSE2
0.010 – 1.500
TSE2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TSE2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
TSE2RM
0.010 – 1.500
SE2-k
SE2-α
SE2-C
SE2-kr
SE2-β
SE3
TSE3
SE4
TSE4
THM
THMIP
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.001 – 0.250 A
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.40 – 10.00 A
0.00 – 5.00 A
TTHM
0.5 – 500.0 min
THMA
NPS1
50 – 99 %
0.10 – 10.00 A
TNPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
NPS2
0.10 – 10.0 A
TNPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
BCD
0.10 – 1.00 A
TBCD
0.00 – 300.00 s
BCD
 240 
Contents
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting
(if MSE1=C)
SEF2 Threshold
SEF2 Time
multiplier
(if MSE2≠D)
SEF2 Definite time
(if MSE2=D)
SEF2 Definite
time reset delay
(if SE2R=DEF)
SEF2 Dependent
time reset time
(if SE2R=DEP)
Configurable
IDMT
Curve setting
(if MSE2=C)
SEF3 Threshold
SEF3 Definite time
SEF4 Threshold
SEF4 Definite time
Thermal Overload
Prior load(Test)
Thermal heating
Time Constant
Thermal Alarm
NPS1 Threshold
NPS1
Definite time
NPS2 Threshold
NPS2
Definite time
Broken Conductor
Threshold
Broken Conductor
Definite time
Default
-- (0.14)
-- (0.02)
-- (0.000)
-- (2.00)
-- (2.00)
-- (0.500)
-- (1.000)
-- (0.00)
-- (0.0)
-- (1.000)
-- (0.14)
-- (0.02)
-- (0.000)
-- (2.00)
-- (2.00)
-- (0.500)
-- (0.00)
-- (0.500)
-- (0.00)
1.00A
0.00A
10.0min
80%
0.40A
0.00s
0.20A
0.00s
0.20A
0.00s
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Menu
Name
CBF
CLP
CBF
TBTC
TRTC
TCLE
TCLR
Range
0.10 – 10.0 A
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 – 300.00 s
0 – 10000 s
0 – 10000 s
ICLDO
0.10 -10.0 A
TCLDO
0.00 – 100.00 s
ICD-2f
10 – 50 %
ICDOC
1.00 – 25.00 A
TRDY
0.0 - 600.0 s
TD1
0.01 - 300.00 s
TR1
0.01 - 310.00 s
TD2
0.01 - 300.00 s
TR2
0.01 - 310.00 s
TD3
0.01 - 300.00 s
TR3
0.01 - 310.00 s
TD4
0.01 - 300.00 s
TR4
0.01 - 310.00 s
TD5
0.01 - 300.00 s
TR5
0.01 - 310.00 s
TW
0.01 - 10.00 s
TSUC
0.0 - 600.0 s
TRCOV
0.1 - 600.0 s
TARCP
0.1 - 600.0 s
TRSET
0.01 - 300.00 s
ICD
Protection
ARC
Test
A.M.F
Off / On
CLPTST
Off – S0 – S3
THMRST
Off / On
SHOTNUM
IECTST
Off - S1 - S2 - S3
- S4 - S5 - S6
Off / On
 241 
Contents
CBF Threshold
Back Trip Definite time
Re-trip Definite time
Cold load Enable timer
Cold load Reset timer
Cold load
drop-off threshold
Cold load drop-off timer
Sensitivity of
Inrush current detector
Threshold of
fundamental current
Reclaim timer
1st shot Dead timer of
Stage1
1st shot Reset timer of
Stage1
2nd shot Dead timer of
Stage1
2nd shot Reset timer of
Stage1
3rd shot Dead timer of
Stage1
3rd shot Reset timer of
Stage1
4th shot Dead timer of
Stage1
4th shot Reset timer of
Stage1
5th shot Dead timer of
Stage1
5th shot Reset timer of
Stage1
Out put pulse timer
Autoreclosing Pause Time
after manually close
Autoreclosing Recovery
time after Final Trip
Autoreclosing Pause Time
after manually close
ARC reset time in CB
closing mode.
Automatic monitoring
function
Cold load Test
Reset THM
element
Forcibly
control
of
Trip/ARC shot number.
IEC103 test mode
Default
0.50A
1.00s
0.50s
100s
100s
0.50A
0.00s
15%
1.00 A
60.0
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
10.00
310.00
2.00
3.0
10.0
10.0
3.00
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
 242 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1.
Relay identification
Type
Serial number
Model
System frequency
Station
Date
Circuit
Engineer
Protection scheme
Witness
Active settings group number
2.
Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
Power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3.
Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit
Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit
 243 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.
Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
Element
Current setting
Measured current
OC1-A
OC2-A
OC3-A
OC4-A
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC2-A
THM-A
THM-T
NPS1
NPS2
BCD
CBF-A
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
Element
Curve setting
Multiplier setting
OC1-A
EF1
EF2
SEF1
SEF2
 244 
Measured time
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5.
Protection scheme test
6.
Metering and recording check
7.
Conjunctive test
Scheme
Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
 245 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
 246 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RETURN / REPAIR FORM
Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRE110 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type:
GRE110
(Example: Type:
Model:
GRE110
Model:
401A
)
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1.
Reason for returning the relay
 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2.
Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB stick or CD rom, or fill
in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 247 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year
/
:
Time
/
:
.
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2010
15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia:
A
Ib:
A
Ic:
A
IE:
A
ISE:
A
I1:
A
I2:
A
I2 / I1 :
THM
%
Fault values
Ia:
Ib:
Ic:
IE:
ISE:
I1:
I2:
I2 / I1 :
THM:
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
%
 248 
/
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.
What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4.
Describe the details of the incident:
5.
Date incident occurred
Day/Month/Year:
/
/
(Example: 10/July/2010)
6.
Give any comments about the GRE110, including the documents:
 249 
/
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 250 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix K
Technical Data
 251 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current In:
Frequency:
Auxiliary supply:
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:
DC supply interruption:
Binary input circuit DC voltage:
1/5A (combined)
50/60Hz
110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 80–264Vac)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
maximum 12%
maximum 50ms at 110V
For alarm indication
110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
For trip circuit supervision
Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)
≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)
≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)
≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)
Overload Ratings
AC phase current inputs:
4 times rated current continuous
100 times rated current for 1 second
Burden
AC phase current inputs:
≤ 0.2VA
AC earth current inputs:
≤ 0.4VA
AC sensitive earth inputs:
≤ 1.2VA
DC power supply:
≤ 10W (quiescent)
Binary input circuit:
≤ 15W (maximum)
≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Current Transformer Requirements
Phase Inputs
Standard Earth Inputs:
Sensitive Earth Inputs:
Typically 5P20 with rated burden according to load, (refer to
manual for detailed instructions).
Core balance CT or residual connection of phase CTs.
Core balance CT.
Phase Overcurrent Protection (50, 51)
st
nd
1 , 2 Overcurrent threshold:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
Reset Definite Delay:
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:
rd
th
3 , 4 Overcurrent thresholds:
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.10 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Definite Time or Dependent Time.
0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
OFF, 0.10 - 150.00A in 0.01A steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
 252 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Earth Fault Protection (50N, 51N)
1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
Reset Definite. Delay:
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:
rd
th
3 , 4 thresholds:
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.05 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Definite Time or Dependent Time
0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
OFF, 0.05 – 100.00A in 0.01A steps
0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50Ns, 51Ns)
st
nd
1 , 2 Overcurrent threshold:
Delay Type:
Stage 1 TMS:
Stage 1 DTL delay:
Stage 1 Reset Type:
Stage 1 Reset Def. Delay:
Stage 1 RTMS:
Stage 2 DTL delay:
3rd, 4th thresholds:
DTL delay:
Residual Power (ZP setting)
OFF, 0.001 - 0.250A in 0.001A steps
DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Definite Time or Dependent Time
0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
OFF, 0.001 - 0.250A in 0.001A steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.00 – 100.00W in 0.01W steps
Phase Undercurrent Protection (37)
1st, 2nd threshold:
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.10 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Iθ = k.IFLC (Thermal setting):
Time constant (τ):
Thermal alarm:
OFF, 0.50 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
0.5 - 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps
Negative Phase Sequence Protection (46)
1st, 2nd threshold:
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.10 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1):
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.10 - 1.00 in 0.01 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
CBF Protection (50BF)
CBF threshold:
CBF stage 1 DTL:
CBF stage 2 DTL:
OFF, 0.10 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Inrush Current Detector
Second harmonic ratio setting (I2f/I1f):
Overcurrent thresholds:
10 – 50% in 1% steps
1.00 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
 253 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Autoreclose (79)
ARC Reclaim Time
Close Pulse Width
Lock-out Recovery Time
Sequences
Dead Times (Programmable for each shot)
0.0 – 600.0s in 0.1s steps
0.01 – 10.00s in 0.01s steps
OFF, 0.1 – 600.0s in 0.1s steps
1 -5 Shots to Lock-out, each trip programmable for inst or
Delayed operation
0.01 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Accuracy
100% of setting ± 3%
approx, 95%
(Gs>0.2A)
100% of setting ± 3%
approx, 105%
(Gs>0.2A)
Undercurrent PU/DO ratio:
Inverse Overcurrent Operate Time:
IEC60255-151, ±5% or 50ms (2 ≤ G/Gs ≤ 20)
All Other Overcurrent Pick-ups:
Overcurrent PU/DO ratio:
Undercurrent Pick-up:
GT = 1.1Gs, GD = 20Gs (Gs ≤ 10A), 200A (Gs > 10A)
Definite Operate Time:
≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥200% of setting)
EF Definite Operate Time:
≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥200% of setting)
UC
Operate Time:
≤DTL + 85ms
NPS
Operate Time:
≤DTL + 150ms (input: ≥200% of setting)
OC
(input: ≤80% of setting)
≤DTL + 30ms (input: ≥200% of setting)
Transient Overreach for instantaneous
<5%
elements:
Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts
Front Communication port - local PC (USB)
CBF Operate Time;
Connector type:
Cable length:
USB-Type B
5m (max.)
Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection:
Cable type:
Cable length:
Connector:
Isolation:
Transmission rate:
Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Twisted pair
1200m (max.)
Screw terminals
1kVac for 1 min.
19.2 kbps
Rear Communication port (Ethernet)
100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX
Binary Inputs
RJ-45 connector
SC connector
Operating Voltage
For alarm indication
Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating
Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating
Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
For trip circuit supervision
≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating
≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating
≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating
≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating
 254 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Binary Outputs
Number
Ratings
model 4∗0 and 4∗1; BO#1 and #2
model 4∗2: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6
other BOs
4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)
Make and carry: 5A continuously
Contact : 0.4A 250Vdc, 8A 380Vac, 3040VA, 150W
Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≥40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Make and carry: 4A continuously
Contact: 0.2A 110Vdc, 8A 250Vac, 2000VA, 240W
Durability:
Loaded contact: ≥1,000 operations
Pickup time:
Reset time:
Unloaded contact: ≥10,000 operations
Less than 15ms
Less than 10ms
Mechanical design
Weight
1.5kg for model 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A
1.8kg for model 402A and 422A
Width
149mm for model 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A
223mm for model 402A and 422A
Height
177mm
Depth
Case color
Installation
168mm
Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Flush mounting with attachment kits
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test
Standards
Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
IEC 60068-2-30
Operating range: -20°C to +60°C.
Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78
Enclosure Protection
IEC 60529
56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1
Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump
IEC 60255-21-2
Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 1
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5
IEEE C37.90.0
High Voltage Impulse
IEC 60255-5
2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
Three positive and three negative impulses of
5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit, BI and BO circuits;
between terminals and earth, and between independent
circuits
3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth
3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts
Electrical Environment
1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
 255 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Test
Standards
Details
IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-12
IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-2
1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.
1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Radiated RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-3
Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-4,
IEEE C37.90.1
4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5,
IEC 61000-4-5
1.2/50µs surge in common/differential modes:
HV, Power Supply Unit and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-6
10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Power Frequency
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-7 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-16
300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and
Radiated Emissions
IEC 60255-25,
EN 55022 Class A,
IEC 61000-6-4
Conducted emissions:
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave
Electrostatic
Discharge
6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic
EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard
EN 60255-27.
 256 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 257 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with
: Measuring element output signal
Marked with
: Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [
]
Marked with "
"
Unmarked
:
Scheme switch
:
Scheme switch position
: Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A
A
B
&
1
Output
C
A
&
1
Output
1
1
A
&
Output
Output
1
0
B
C
1
0
Other cases
C
B
C
Other cases
A
B
B
Output
1
0
A
B
C
Output
1
0
0
1
Other cases
C
0
OR gates
A
B
≥1
Output
A
B
C
Output
0
0
0
0
Other cases
C
A
B
≥1
Output
A
B
C
Output
0
0
1
0
C
Other cases
A
B
1
≥1
Output
C
1
A
B
C
Output
0
1
1
0
Other cases
1
XOR gates
A
=1
Output
B
 258 
A
B
Output
0
1
1
1
0
1
Other cases
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Signal inversion
A
Output
1
A
Output
0
1
1
0
Timer
t
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
0
XXX:
Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX:
Set time
XXX
t
Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting
0
XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0
Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting
t
XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A
Output
Output
XXX - YYY
XXX - YYY: Setting range
Flip-flop
S
F/F
Output
R
S
R
Output
0
0
No change
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
A
Switch
Output
1
ON
1
Other cases
0
Switch
Output
ON
1
OFF
0
Scheme switch
A
Output
ON
+
Output
ON
 259 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix M
Modbus: Interoperability
 260 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Modbus: Interoperability
1. Physical and Data Link Layer
- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface
- RTU mode only
- Coding System:
8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)
Even parity
- Address setting range: 1-247
- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200
2. Application Layer
(1) Modbus response format
FC Description
Supplementary explanation
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
16
17
43
Returns remote control enable flag
Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.
Returns value of analog inputs
Remote command and Time synchronization
Need to specify record number
Returns relay and CB status
Current time setting, etc.
Returns device ID
Returns device information
Read Coils
Read Discrete Inputs
Read Holding Registers
Read Input Register
Write Single Coil
Write Single Register
Read Exception status
Diagnostic
Write Multiple Registers
Report Slave ID
Read device Identification (SC:14)
For FC (Function Code) = 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described
in "Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".
For other FCs, the response format is as following:
07 Read Exception status
Response Data
Output Data (1byte)
bit Description
0 IN SERVICE (LED)
1 TRIP (LED)
2 ALARM (LED)
3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
4 CB CLOSED (LED)
5 CB OPEN (LED)
6 Relay fail output (BO)
7 <Reserved>
 261 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
08 Diagnostic
Response Data
SC
Response Data Field
00
Echo Request Data (2Bytes)
01
<not supported>
02
Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes)
bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)
bit1 TRIP (LED)
bit2 ALARM (LED)
bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
bit4 <Reserved>
bit5 <Reserved>
bit6 <Reserved>
bit7 <Reserved>
bit8 3-phase current balance alarm
bit9 CB contact status alarm
bit10 CB operation number alarm
bit11 CB operating time alarm
bit12 ∑Iy monitoring alarm
bit13 trip circuit supervision alarm
bit14 <Reserved>
bit15 <Reserved>
03<not supported>
17 Report Slave ID
Response Data
Byte Count (1byte)
Slave ID (17bytes)
GRE110-401A-00-10
Run Indicator Status (1byte)
Description
Return Query Data
Return Diagnostic Register
18bytes
Relay type and model ID
ASCII
0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service
43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)
Response Data
Param OID
01
00
TOSHIBA
01
GRE110-401
02
A
02
03
<Non>
04
GRE110
05
401A-10-10
06
Motor Protection
07<Reserved>
03
80
<SPASE>
81
GS1EM1-02-A
04
<not supported>
Basic device identification
Vendor Name
Product Code
Major Minor Revision
Regular device identification
Vendor URL
Product Name
Model Name
User Application Name
Reserved
Extended device identification
Software version
One specific identification object
 262 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
(2) Modbus address map group
Modbus data model Address(ID)
Coils
0x0200
(Read/Write)
0x0400
Discrete Input
(Read Only)
0x1000
0x1016
0x1040
0x1080
0x1201
Input Registers
0x2000
Number Data specification
1 Remote control (enable flag)
Remote control (command, interlock), Time
5
synchronization, Clear command (write only)
6 BI
5 Relay fail output, BO
14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)
16 Virtual LED
－
Signal list (see Appendix B for detail)
Analog data (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Thermal, Ia max etc.,
24
unconverted to engineering units)
2-word long
Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,
29
write protected
Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200
72
records, write protected
4 Current time data (IEC format)
36 Counter data (number of trips, ∑Iy, etc), 2-word long
2 Password for remote control
－ Setting value (see Appendix H for detail)
Undefined after this address
(Read Only)
Holding Registers
0x3000
(Read/Write)
0x3200
0x3800
0x3810
0x3E82
0x4000
0x8000
Discrete Inputs
Coils
Input Registers
Holding Registers
Single bit
Single bit
16-bit word
16-bit word
(3)Modbus address map
Address
Description
Read-Only
Read-Write
Read-Only
Read-Write
Supplementary explanation
Coils
0200
0400
0401
0402
0403
Remote control (R/W)
Remote control enable flag
Remote control command
Remote interlock command
Remote reset command
Time synchronization
command
Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on)
Call time synchronization task (on)
 263 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
Description
Discrete Input
BI status (R)
1000
BI1
1001
BI2
1002
BI3
1003
BI4
1004
BI5
1005
BI6
BO status (R)
1016
Relay fail output
1017
BO1
1018
BO2
1019
BO3
101A
BO4
101B
BO5
101C
BO6
101D
BO7
101E
BO8
LED lamp status (R)
1040
IN SERVICE
1041
TRIP
1042
ALARM
1043
RELAY FAIL
1044
CB CLOSED
1045
CB OPEN
1046
LOCAL
1047
REMOTE
1048
LED1
1049
LED2
104A
LED3
104B
LED4
104C
LED5
104D
LED6
Virtual LED status (R)
1080
IND1 BIT1
1081
IND1 BIT2
1082
IND1 BIT3
1083
IND1 BIT4
1084
IND1 BIT5
1085
IND1 BIT6
1086
IND1 BIT7
1087
IND1 BIT8
1088
IND2 BIT1
…
IND2 BITn
Supplementary explanation
Only for GRE110-4x1A
Only for GRE110-4x1A
Only for GRE110-4x1A
Only for GRE110-4x1A
Address forIND2 BIT No.n = 0x1087 + n.
 264 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
1201
1202
…
Signal list (R)
Signal No.1
Signal No.2
Signal No.n
See Appendix B
See Appendix B
Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix B
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
Input Registers
Analog data (R)
2000
Ia (H)
2001
Ia (L)
2002
Ib (H)
2003
Ib (L)
2004
Ic (H)
2005
Ic (L)
2006
Ie (H)
2007
Ie (L)
2008
Ise (H)
2009
Ise (L)
200A
I1 (H)
200B
I1 (L)
200C
I2 (H)
200D
I2 (L)
200E
I2/I1 (H)
200F
I2/I1 (L)
2010
Thermal (H)
2011
Thermal (L)
2012
2013
2014
Ia max (H)
2015
Ia max (L)
2016
Ib max (H)
2017
Ib max (L)
2018
Ic max (H)
2019
Ic max (L)
201A
Ie max (H)
201B
Ie max (L)
201C
Ise max (H)
201D
Ise max (L)
201E
I2 max (H)
201F
I2 max (L)
2020
I2/I1 max (H)
2021
I2/I1 max (L)
The following are NOT converted to engineering units.
Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
Primary: value×0.0025×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: value×0.0025(A)
Only for GRE110-42xA
Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
100x displayed value
Primary: value×0.01×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
Secondary: value×0.01(A)
Only for GRE110-42xA
100x displayed value
 265 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
280A
280B
280C
280D
280E
280F
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
281A
281B
281C
281D
281E
281F
2820
2821
Description
Supplementary explanation
Analog data (R)
The following are converted to engineering units.
(same as displayed value)
Ia (H)
Ia (L)
Ib (H)
Ib (L)
Ic (H)
Ic (L)
Ie (H)
Ie (L)
Ise (H)
Ise (L)
I1 (H)
I1 (L)
I2 (H)
I2 (L)
I2/I1 (H)
I2/I1 (L)
Thermal (H)
Thermal (L)
Ia max (H)
Ia max (L)
Ib max (H)
Ib max (L)
Ic max (H)
Ic max (L)
Ie max (H)
Ie max (L)
Ise max (H)
Ise max (L)
I2 max (H)
I2 max (L)
I2/I1 max (H)
I2/I1 max (L)
Only for GRE110-42xA
Only for GRE110-42xA
 266 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
Description
Holding Registers
Fault record (R)
3000
records count
3001
No.1
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
3008
No.2
3009
300A
300B
300C
300D
300E
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
300F
No.3
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
3016
No.4
3017
3018
3019
301A
301B
301C
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
Supplementary explanation
Number of record saved (max. 4)
Indication of record #1. If no data, all following data are set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #2. If no data, all following data are set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #3. If no data, all following data are set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #4. If no data, all following data are set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
 267 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
3200
Event record (R)
records count
3201
set No. (R/W)
3202
No.X
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3209
No.X+1
320A
320B
320C
320D
320E
320F
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3210
No.X+2
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3217
No.X+3
3218
3219
321A
321B
321C
321D
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
321E
No.X+4
321F
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
10 records are obtained at a time.
Number of records saved (max. 200)
Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10
records)
Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
 268 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
Description
3225
No.X+5
3226
3227
3228
3229
322A
322B
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
322C
No.X+6
322D
322E
322F
3230
3231
3232
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3233
No.X+7
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
323A
No.X+8
323B
323C
323D
323E
323F
3240
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3241
No.X+9
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
Supplementary explanation
Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix C
1:on 、2:off
 269 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Address
3800
3801
3802
3803
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
381A
381B
381C
381D
3E82
3E83
4000
7FFF
Description
Supplementary explanation
Current time data (R/W)
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Counters (R/W)
Trips Phase-A (H)
Trips Phase-A (L)
Trips Phase-B (H)
Trips Phase-B (L)
Trips Phase-C (H)
Trips Phase-C (L)
Trips any phase (H)
Trips any phase (L)
∑Iy A (H)
∑Iy A (L)
∑Iy B (H)
∑Iy B (L)
∑Iy C (H)
∑Iy C (L)
Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Password
Control (H)
Control (L)
Setting values
See the next table for setting
values.
<Reserved>
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
Can be set initial value.
3E82
3E83
4000
7FFF
 270 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
(4) Modbus address for setting values
Setting Group
(Menu)
Event Record
Disturbance
Record
Address
Name
Contents
6034
BI1 comm.
BI 1 command trigger setting
6035
6036
6037
BI2 comm.
BI3 comm.
BI4 comm.
BI 2 command trigger setting
BI 3 command trigger setting
BI 4 command trigger setting
6038
6039
BI5 comm.
BI6 comm.
BI 5 command trigger setting
BI 6 command trigger setting
603C
6000
6001
6002
6003
Time1
Time2
OC
EF
SEF
Disturbance record period before fault
Disturbance record period after fault
OC element for disturbance
EF element for disturbance
SEF element for disturbance
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
600A
NPS
Trip
BI
OC
EF
SEF
NPS
NPS element for disturbance
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
600B
600C
600D
600E
600F
6010
6011
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
6012
6013
SIG8
SIG9
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
6014
6015
SIG10
SIG11
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
6016
6017
SIG12
SIG13
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
6018
6019
601A
601B
601C
601D
601E
601F
6020
6021
6022
6023
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16
SIG17
SIG18
SIG19
SIG20
SIG21
SIG22
SIG23
SIG24
SIG25
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
 271 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Counter
Status
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6024
SIG26
Disturbance trigger
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
SIG27
SIG28
SIG29
SIG30
SIG31
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
602A
SIG32
Disturbance trigger
602B
TCSPEN
TCAEN
ΣIyAEN
Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm
Enable
Trip Count Alarm Enable
ΣIy Alarm Enable
602F
6030
6031
6032
6033
6400
6401
OPTAEN
TCALM
ΣIyALM
YVALUE
OPTALM
Display
Time sync.
Operate Time Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting
ΣIy Alarm Threshold setting
Y value of ΣIy monitoring
Operating Time Alarm Threshold setting
Metering
Time synchronization method
4A61
4A62
Time sync
GMT
Time synchronization method by optional com.
Time zone (hour)
4A6A
GMTm
Time zone(minutes)
6C00
6C01
6C02
6C03
BITHR1
BITHR2
BI1
BI1
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
BI threshold for BI1 & BI2
BI threshold for BI3-6
Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay
6C04
6C05
BI1
BI1
BI1SNS
BI1SGS
Binary Input 1 Sense
Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select
6C06
6C07
BI1
BI1
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
6C08
6C09
6C0A
6C0B
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
6C0C
6C0D
6C0E
6C0F
6C10
6C11
6C12
6C13
6C14
6C15
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
UCBLK
THMBLK
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
602C
602D
602E
CBSMEN
 272 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6C16
BI1
TCFALM
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C17
6C18
6C19
6C1A
6C1B
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3phase
External Trip - Aphase
External Trip - Bphase
6C1C
6C1D
6C1E
6C1F
6C20
6C21
6C22
6C23
6C24
6C25
6C26
6C27
6C28
6C29
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
ARCBLK
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
External Trip - Cphase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
ARC scheme block command.
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
6C2A
6C2B
BI2
BI2
BI2PUD
BI2DOD
Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay
6C2C
BI2
BI2SNS
Binary Input 2 Sense
6C2D
6C2E
6C2F
6C30
6C31
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2SGS
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
6C32
6C33
BI2
BI2
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
6C34
6C35
6C36
6C37
6C38
6C39
6C3A
6C3B
6C3C
6C3D
6C3E
6C3F
6C40
6C41
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
UCBLK
THMBLK
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3phase
 273 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6C42
BI2
EXTAPH
External Trip - Aphase
6C43
6C44
6C45
6C46
6C47
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
External Trip - Bphase
External Trip - Cphase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
6C48
6C49
6C4A
6C4B
6C4C
6C4D
6C4E
6C4F
6C50
6C51
6C52
6C53
6C54
6C55
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
ARCBLK
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
BI3PUD
BI3DOD
BI3SNS
BI3SGS
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
ARC scheme block command.
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 3 Sense
Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select
6C56
6C57
BI3
BI3
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
6C58
6C59
6C5A
6C5B
6C5C
6C5D
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
6C5E
6C5F
BI3
BI3
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
6C60
6C61
6C62
6C63
6C64
6C65
6C66
6C67
6C68
6C69
6C6A
6C6B
6C6C
6C6D
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
UCBLK
THMBLK
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip – 3 phase
External Trip – A phase
External Trip – B phase
External Trip – C phase
Remote Reset
 274 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6C6E
BI3
SYNCLK
Synchronize clock
6C6F
6C70
6C71
6C72
6C73
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
6C74
6C75
6C76
6C77
6C78
6C79
6C7A
6C7B
6C7C
6C7D
6C7E
6C7F
6C80
6C81
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
ARCBLK
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
BI4PUD
BI4DOD
BI4SNS
BI4SGS
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
ARC scheme block command.
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 4 Sense
Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
6C82
6C83
BI4
BI4
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
6C84
6C85
6C86
6C87
6C88
6C89
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
6C8A
6C8B
BI4
BI4
UCBLK
THMBLK
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
6C8C
6C8D
6C8E
6C8F
6C90
6C91
6C92
6C93
6C94
6C95
6C96
6C97
6C98
6C99
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip – 3 phase
External Trip – A phase
External Trip – B phase
External Trip – C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
 275 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6C9A
BI4
Alarm3
Alarm screen 3.
6C9B
6C9C
6C9D
6C9E
6C9F
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
ARCBLK
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
ARC scheme block command.
6CA0
6CA1
6CA2
6CA3
6CA4
6CA5
6CA6
6CA7
6CA8
6CA9
6CAA
6CAB
6CAC
6CAD
BI4
BI4
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
BI5PUD
BI5DOD
BI5SNS
BI5SGS
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 5 Sense
Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
6CAE
6CAF
BI5
BI5
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
6CB0
6CB1
6CB2
6CB3
6CB4
6CB5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
UCBLK
THMBLK
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
6CB6
6CB7
BI5
BI5
TCFALM
CBOPN
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
6CB8
6CB9
6CBA
6CBB
6CBC
6CBD
6CBE
6CBF
6CC0
6CC1
6CC2
6CC3
6CC4
6CC5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip – 3 phase
External Trip – A phase
External Trip – B phase
External Trip – C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
 276 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
Name
Contents
6CC6
BI5
CNTLCK
Interlock Input
6CC7
6CC8
6CC9
6CCA
6CCB
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI6
BI6
ARCBLK
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
BI6PUD
BI6DOD
ARC scheme block command.
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay
6CCC
6CCD
6CCE
6CCF
6CD0
6CD1
6CD2
6CD3
6CD4
6CD5
6CD6
6CD7
6CD8
6CD9
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6SNS
BI6SGS
OC1BLK
OC2BLK
OC3BLK
OC4BLK
EF1BLK
EF2BLK
EF3BLK
EF4BLK
SE1BLK
SE2BLK
SE3BLK
SE4BLK
Binary Input 6 Sense
Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select
OC1 Block
OC2 Block
OC3 Block
OC4 Block
EF1 Block
EF2 Block
EF3 Block
EF4 Block
SEF1 Block
SEF2 Block
SEF3 Block
SEF4 Block
6CDA
6CDB
BI6
BI6
UCBLK
THMBLK
Undercurrent Block
Thermal Protection Block
6CDC
6CDD
6CDE
6CDF
6CE0
6CE1
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
NPSBLK
BCDBLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
NPS Block
Broken Conductor Protection Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip – 3 phase
6CE2
6CE3
BI6
BI6
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
External Trip – A phase
External Trip – B phase
6CE4
6CE5
6CE6
6CE7
6CE8
6CE9
6CEA
6CEB
6CEC
6CED
6CEE
6CEF
6CF0
6CF1
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
ARCBLK
ARCNAT
ARCMCL
External Trip – C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
ARC scheme block command.
ARC not applied command.
ARC manual close command.
 277 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Output
Address
Name
Contents
7428
7429
7400
7401
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO1
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
7402
7403
7450
742A
742B
7404
7405
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
7406
7407
7451
742C
742D
7408
7409
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO3
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
740A
740B
7452
742E
742F
740C
740D
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO4
BO4
BO4
BO4
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
740E
740F
BO4
BO4
In #3
In #4
Functions
Functions
7453
7430
BO4
BO5
TBO
Logic
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
7431
7410
BO5
BO5
Reset
In #1
Reset operation
Functions
7411
7412
7413
7454
7432
7433
7414
7415
7416
7417
7455
7434
BO5
BO5
BO5
BO5
BO6
BO6
BO6
BO6
BO6
BO6
BO6
BO7
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
 278 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Configurable LED
Address
Name
Contents
7435
BO7
Reset
Reset operation
7418
7419
741A
741B
7456
BO7
BO7
BO7
BO7
BO7
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
7436
7437
741C
741D
741E
741F
7457
BO8
BO8
BO8
BO8
BO8
BO8
BO8
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
LED1
LED1
LED2
LED2
LED3
LED3
LED4
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
LED1 Logic Gate Type
LED1 Reset operation
LED2 Logic Gate Type
LED2 Reset operation
LED3 Logic Gate Type
LED3 Reset operation
LED4 Logic Gate Type
7027
7028
LED4
LED5
Reset
Logic
LED4 Reset operation
LED5 Logic Gate Type
7029
702A
702B
7000
7001
7002
LED5
LED6
LED6
LED1
LED1
LED1
Reset
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
LED5 Reset operation
LED6 Logic Gate Type
LED6 Reset operation
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
7003
7004
LED1
LED2
In #4
In #1
LED Functions
LED Functions
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
700A
700B
700C
700D
700E
700F
7010
7011
7012
LED2
LED2
LED2
LED3
LED3
LED3
LED3
LED4
LED4
LED4
LED4
LED5
LED5
LED5
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
 279 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
Configurable LED
Active group/
Common
Address
Name
Contents
7013
LED5
In #4
LED Functions
7014
7015
7016
7017
7060
LED6
LED6
LED6
LED6
LED1
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Color
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Color
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7050
7051
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
CB CLOSED
IND1 Reset
IND2 Reset
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
IND1 Reset operation
IND1 Reset operation
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
7036
7037
IND1
IND1
BIT7
BIT8
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
7038
7039
703A
703B
703C
703D
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
703E
703F
IND2
IND2
BIT7
BIT8
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
6800
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
Active gp.
AOLED
Control
Interlock
Control Kind
Frequency
Active setting group
ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output
Control enable
Interlock enable
Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)
Frequency
 280 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Protection
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
4C00
4C01
4C03
4C05
4028
4001
Gr.2
5C00
5C01
5C03
5C05
5028
5001
OCCT
EFCT
SEFCT
VEVT
SVCNT
OC
OC1EN
CT ratio of OC
CT ratio of EF
CT ratio of SEF (for SEF model)
VT ratio of SEF (for 82xA model)
AC input imbalance
OC1 Enable
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
MOC1
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
OC1R
OC1 Delay Type
OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
OC1 US Inverse Curve Type
OC1 Reset Characteristic
4038
4007
5038
5007
OC
OC
OC1-2F
OC2EN
4029
402A
402B
402C
402D
4039
4008
5029
502A
502B
502C
502D
5039
5008
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
MOC2
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
OC2R
OC2-2F
OC3EN
403A
4009
503A
5009
OC
OC
OC3-2F
OC4EN
403B
400A
400B
400C
400D
400E
400F
4010
4011
403C
4012
402E
402F
4030
4031
4032
403D
4013
403E
4014
503B
500A
500B
500C
500D
500E
500F
5010
5011
503C
5012
502E
502F
5030
5031
5032
503D
5013
503E
5014
OC
UC
UC
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
OC4-2F
UC1EN
UC2EN
EF1EN
MEF1
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
EF1R
EF1-2F
EF2EN
MEF2
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
EF2R
EF2-2F
EF3EN
EF3-2F
EF4EN
 281 
2f Block Enable
OC2 Enable
OC2 Delay Type
OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
OC2 US Inverse Curve Type
OC2 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
OC3 Enable
2f Block Enable
OC4 Enable
2f Block Enable
UC1 Enable
UC2 Enable
EF1 Enable
EF1 Delay Type
EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
EF1 US Inverse Curve Type
EF1 Reset Characteristic.
2f Block Enable
EF2 Enable
EF2 Delay Type
EF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
EF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
EF2 US Inverse Curve Type
EF2 Reset Characteristic
2f Block Enable
EF3 Enable
2f Block Enable
EF4 Enable
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Protection
Protection
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
403F
Gr.2
503F
EF
EF4-2F
2f Block Enable
4015
4016
5015
5016
SEF
SEF
SE1EN
MSE1
SEF1 Enable
SEF1 Delay Type
40A7
4017
4018
4019
401A
50A7
5017
5018
5019
501A
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SE1-DIR
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
SE1R
401B
4040
401C
4033
40A8
501B
5040
501C
5033
50A8
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SE1S2
SE1-2F
SE2EN
MSE2
SE2-DIR
4034
4035
4036
4037
5034
5035
5036
5037
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
SE2R
4041
401D
5041
501D
SEF
SEF
SE2-2F
SE3EN
2f Block Enable
SEF3 Enable
4042
40A9
401E
4043
40AA
40AB
401F
4020
4021
4044
4022
4045
4023
4046
4024
4025
4026
5042
50A9
501E
5043
50AA
50AB
501F
5020
5021
5044
5022
5045
5023
5046
5024
5025
5026
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
Thermal
Thermal
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
BCD
BCD
CBF
CBF
Cold Load
SE3-2F
SE3-DIR
SE4EN
SE4-2F
SE4-DIR
ZPEN
THMEN
THMAEN
NPS1EN
NPS1-2F
NPS2EN
NPS2-2F
BCDEN
BCD-2F
BTC
RTC
CLSG
2f Block Enable
SEF3 Directional
SEF4 Enable
2f Block Enable
SEF4 Directional
Residual Power block Enable
Thermal OL Enable
Thermal Alarm Enable
NPS1 Enable
2f Block Enable
NPS2 Enable
2f Block Enable
Broken Conductor Enable
2f Block Enable
Back-trip control
Re-trip control
Cold Load settings group
4027
4800
4806
4400
4807
4808
4801
5027
5800
5806
5400
5807
5808
5801
Cold Load
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
CLDOEN
OC1
TOC1
TOC1
TOC1R
TOC1RM
OC2
Cold Load drop-off enable
OC1 Threshold setting
OC1 Time multiplier setting
OC1 Definite time setting
OC1 Definite time reset delay
OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
OC2 Threshold setting
 282 
SEF1 Directional
SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type
SEF1 Reset Characteristic
SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable
2f Block Enable
SEF2 Enable
SEF2 Delay Type
SEF2 Directional
SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type
SEF2 Reset Characteristic
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
483E
Gr.2
583E
OC
TOC2
OC2 Definite time setting
4401
483F
5401
583F
OC
OC
TOC2
TOC2R
OC2 Definite time setting
OC2 Definite time reset delay
4840
4802
4402
4803
4403
5840
5802
5402
5803
5403
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
TOC2RM
OC3
TOC3
OC4
TOC4
OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
OC3 Threshold setting
OC3 Definite time setting
OC4 Threshold setting
OC4 Definite time setting
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC1-k
OC1-α
OC1-C
OC1-kr
OC1-β
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4825
4826
4827
4828
5825
5826
5827
5828
OC
OC
OC
OC
OC2-k
OC2-α
OC2-C
OC2-kr
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4829
4804
5829
5804
OC
UC
OC2-β
UC1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
UC1 Threshold setting
4404
4805
4405
4809
480D
4406
480E
480F
480A
4841
4407
4842
4843
480B
4408
480C
4409
5404
5805
5405
5809
580D
5406
580E
580F
580A
5841
5407
5842
5843
580B
5408
580C
5409
UC
UC
UC
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
TUC1
UC2
TUC2
EF1
TEF1
TEF1
TEF1R
TEF1RM
EF2
TEF2
TEF2
TEF2R
TEF2RM
EF3
TEF3
EF4
TEF4
UC1 Definite time setting
UC2 Threshold setting
UC2 Definite time setting
EF1 Threshold setting
EF1 Time multiplier setting
EF1 Definite time setting
EF1 Definite time reset delay
EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF2 Threshold setting
EF2 Time multiplier setting
EF2 Definite time setting.
EF2 Definite time reset delay
EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF3 Threshold setting
EF3 Definite time setting
EF4 Threshold setting
EF4 Definite time setting
482A
482B
482C
482D
482E
482F
4830
582A
582B
582C
582D
582E
582F
5830
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF1-k
EF1-α
EF1-C
EF1-kr
EF1-β
EF2-k
EF2-α
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
 283 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Protection
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
4831
Gr.2
5831
EF
EF2-C
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
4832
4833
5832
5833
EF
EF
EF2-kr
EF2-β
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
484C
484D
4810
4814
440A
584C
584D
5810
5814
540A
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEθ
SEV
SE1
TSE1
TSE1
SEF Characteristic Angle
SEF ZPS voltage level
SE1 Threshold setting
SEF1 Time multiplier setting
SEF1 Definite time setting
4815
4816
440B
4811
4844
5815
5816
540B
5811
5844
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
TSE1R
TSE1RM
TSE1S2
SE2
TSE2
SEF1 Definite time reset delay
SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF2 Threshold setting
SEF2 Threshold setting
SEF2 Time multiplier setting
440C
4845
4846
4812
540C
5845
5846
5812
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
TSE2
TSE2R
TSE2RM
SE3
SEF2 Definite time setting
SEF2 Definite time reset delay
SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF3 Threshold setting
440D
4813
540D
5813
SEF
SEF
TSE3
SE4
SEF3 Definite time setting
SEF4 Threshold setting
440E
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
483A
483B
483C
483D
484E
4817
481F
4819
4818
481A
540E
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
583A
583B
583C
583D
584E
5817
581F
5819
5818
581A
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
SEF
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
Thermal
NPS
TSE4
SE1-k
SE1-α
SE1-C
SE1-kr
SE1-β
SE2-k
SE2-α
SE2-C
SE2-kr
SE2-β
ZP
THM
THMIP
TTHM
THMA
NPS1
SEF4 Definite time setting
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
Residual Power Threshold
Thermal overload setting
Prior load setting
Thermal Time Constant
Thermal alarm setting
NPS1 Threshold setting
440F
481B
4410
481C
4411
481D
4412
540F
581B
5410
581C
5411
581D
5412
NPS
NPS
NPS
BCD
BCD
CBF
CBF
TNPS1
NPS2
TNPS2
BCD
TBCD
CBF
TBTC
NPS1 Definite time setting
NPS2 Threshold setting
NPS2 Definite time setting
Broken Conductor Threshold setting
Broken Conductor Definite time setting
CBF Threshold setting
Back trip Definite time setting
 284 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
4413
Gr.2
5413
CBF
TRTC
Re-trip Definite time setting
4414
4415
5414
5415
Cold Load
Cold Load
TCLE
TCLR
Cold load enable timer
Cold load reset timer
481E
4416
484A
484B
4050
581E
5416
584A
584B
5050
Cold Load
Cold Load
Inrush
Inrush
ARC
ICLDO
TCLDO
ICD-2f
ICDOC
AECEN
Cold load drop-off threshold setting
Cold load drop-off timer
Sensitivity of 2f
Threshold of fundamental current
Autoreclosing Enable
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ACR-NUM
OC1-INIT
OC1-TP1
OC1-TP2
OC1-TP3
Reclosing shot max. number
Autoreclosing initiation by OC1
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
4056
4057
4058
4059
5056
5057
5058
5059
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
OC1-TP4
OC1-TP5
OC1-TP6
OC2-INIT
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
OC1 trip mode of 5th trip
OC1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC2
405A
405B
505A
505B
ARC
ARC
OC2-TP1
OC2-TP2
OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
405C
405D
405E
405F
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
406A
406B
406C
505C
505D
505E
505F
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
506A
506B
506C
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
OC2-TP3
OC2-TP4
OC2-TP5
OC2-TP6
OC3-INIT
OC3-TP1
OC3-TP2
OC3-TP3
OC3-TP4
OC3-TP5
OC3-TP6
OC4-INIT
OC4-TP1
OC4-TP2
OC4-TP3
OC4-TP4
OC4-TP5
OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC3
OC3 trip mode of 1st trip
OC3 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC3 trip mode of 4th trip
OC3 trip mode of 5th trip
OC3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by OC4
OC4 trip mode of 1st trip
OC4 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
406D
406E
406F
4070
4071
4072
4073
506D
506E
506F
5070
5071
5072
5073
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
OC4-TP6
EF1-INIT
EF1-TP1
EF1-TP2
EF1-TP3
EF1-TP4
EF1-TP5
OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF1
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
EF1 trip mode of 5th trip
 285 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
4074
Gr.2
5074
ARC
EF1-TP6
EF1 trip mode of 6th trip
4075
4076
5075
5076
ARC
ARC
EF2-INIT
EF2-TP1
Autoreclosing initiation by EF2
EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
4077
4078
4079
407A
407B
5077
5078
5079
507A
507B
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
EF2-TP2
EF2-TP3
EF2-TP4
EF2-TP5
EF2-TP6
EF2 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF2 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF2 trip mode of 4th trip
EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
407C
407D
407E
407F
4080
507C
507D
507E
507F
5080
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
EF3-INIT
EF3-TP1
EF3-TP2
EF3-TP3
EF3-TP4
Autoreclosing initiation by EF3
EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF3 trip mode of 4th trip
4081
4082
4083
4084
5081
5082
5083
5084
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
EF3-TP5
EF3-TP6
EF4-INIT
EF4-TP1
EF3 trip mode of 5th trip
EF3 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by EF4
EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
4085
4086
5085
5086
ARC
ARC
EF4-TP2
EF4-TP3
EF4 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF4 trip mode of 3rd trip
4087
4088
4089
408A
408B
408C
408D
408E
408F
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
5087
5088
5089
508A
508B
508C
508D
508E
508F
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
EF4-TP4
EF4-TP5
EF4-TP6
SE1-INIT
SE1-TP1
SE1-TP2
SE1-TP3
SE1-TP4
SE1-TP5
SE1-TP6
SE2-INIT
SE2-TP1
SE2-TP2
SE2-TP3
SE2-TP4
SE2-TP5
SE2-TP6
EF4 trip mode of 4th trip
EF4 trip mode of 5th trip
EF4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by SE1
SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
SE1 trip mode of 5th trip
SE1 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by SE2
SE2 trip mode of 1st trip
SE2 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE2 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE2 trip mode of 4th trip
SE2 trip mode of 5th trip
SE2 trip mode of 6th trip
4098
4099
409A
409B
409C
409D
409E
5098
5099
509A
509B
509C
509D
509E
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
SE3-INIT
SE3-TP1
SE3-TP2
SE3-TP3
SE3-TP4
SE3-TP5
SE3-TP6
Autoreclosing initiation by SE3
SE3 trip mode of 1st trip
SE3 trip mode of 2nd trip
SE3 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE3 trip mode of 4th trip
SE3 trip mode of 5th trip
SE3 trip mode of 6th trip
 286 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Group
(Menu)
Address
Name
Contents
Gr.1
409F
Gr.2
509F
ARC
SE4-INIT
Autoreclosing initiation by SE4
40A0
40A1
50A0
50A1
ARC
ARC
SE4-TP1
SE4-TP2
SE4 trip mode of 1st trip
SE4 trip mode of 2nd trip
40A2
40A3
40A4
40A5
40A6
50A2
50A3
50A4
50A5
50A6
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
SE4-TP3
SE4-TP4
SE4-TP5
SE4-TP6
EXT-INIT
SE4 trip mode of 3rd trip
SE4 trip mode of 4th trip
SE4 trip mode of 5th trip
SE4 trip mode of 6th trip
Autoreclosing initiation by External signal
441E
441F
4420
4421
4422
541E
541F
5420
5421
5422
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
Reclaim timer
1st shot Dead timer of Stage1
1st shot Reset timer of Stage1
2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1
2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4423
4424
4425
4426
5423
5424
5425
5426
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1
3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4th shot Dead timer of Stage1
4th shot Reset timer of Stage1
4427
4428
5427
5428
ARC
ARC
TD5
TR5
5th shot Dead timer of Stage1
5th shot Reset timer of Stage1
4429
442A
442B
442C
442D
5429
542A
542B
542C
542D
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
ARC
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
Output pulse timer
Autoreclosing Pause Timer after manually close
Autoreclosig Recovery time after Final trip
Autreclosing Pause timer after manually close
ARC reset time in CB closing mode
3. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the Modbus communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control (CB on / off)
- Change of interlock position
- LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with Modbus communication is require the following three steps.
- Pass word authentication
- Enable flag setting for remote control
- Remote control
 287 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION
To control the CB at remote site, set the control hierarchy setting of relay to “Remote”.
A. Pass word authentication
To authenticate the password, enter the password for control function to the address of “3E82” . The
password is the same as that of control function.
The password retention is 1 minute.
If no password is set, please enter “0000” as password.
The sending messages transmitted with ASCII code.
Ex. “0000” -> “303030303”
Message example (Relay address:01, Password:0000, need CRC frame)
to relay
01103E8200020430303030
from relay
01103E820002
B. Enable flag setting for remote control
To enable the remote control, turn on the address of “0200 : Remote control enable flag”.
When the operation completed or time-out occurs, the flag is reset.
Flag state can be checked in the command of “FC=01 Read Coils”.
Message example
to relay
02050200FF00
from relay
02050200FF00
C. Remote control
To control the CB at remote site, turn on or off the address of “0400: Remote control
command”, ”0401: Remote interlock command” or “0402: Remote reset command”.
The “On” operation command is “FF00”. The “Off” operation command is “0000”.
The operation reply is checked by the “BO” or “LED” signals according to the relay settings.
Message example (Relay address:01、CB on, need CRC frame)
to relay
01050400FF00
from relay
01050400FF00
 288 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Message example (Relay address:01、CB off, need CRC frame)
to relay
010504000000
from relay
010504000000
 289 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix N
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 290 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (Application Service Data Unit)
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using the Function type (FUN) / Information
numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. 8 wide-use events are provided.
3.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
3.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 and 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values is 2 seconds.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either
1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. Either 1.2 or 2.4 can be selected by the
“IECNFI” setting.
3.4 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the table below. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
3.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
3.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
 291 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. List of Information
List of Information
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Type
ID
COT
FUN
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0
End of General Interrogation
Transmission completion of GI items.
--
8
10
255
0
Time Synchronization
Time Synchronization ACK.
--
6
8
255
2
Reset FCB
Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK
--
5
3
160
3
Reset CU
Reset CU ACK
--
5
4
160
4
Start/Restart
Relay start/restart
--
5
5
160
5
Power On
Relay power on.
Not supported
Status Indications
16
Auto-recloser active
17
Teleprotection active
18
Protection active
19
LED reset
20
Monitor direction blocked
21
Test mode
22
Local parameter Setting
23
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set active, if
impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available, this item is
set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If not,
set to inactive.
Reset of latched LEDs
GI
1
1, 7, 9, 12,
20, 21
160
Not supported
GI
1
--
1
1, 7, 9, 12,
20, 21
1, 7, 11, 12,
20, 21
160
160
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control system.
IECBLK: "Blocked" setting.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to control
system. IECTST: "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the event is
sent to control system.
GI
1
9, 11
160
GI
1
9, 11
160
Characteristic1
Setting group 1 active
GI
1
24
Characteristic2
Setting group 2 active
GI
1
25
Characteristic3
Setting group 3 active
Not supported
26
Characteristic4
Setting group 4 active
Not supported
27
Auxiliary input1
User specified signal 1 (Signal specified by IECB1: ON) (*1)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
28
Auxiliary input2
User specified signal 2 (Signal specified by IECB2: ON) (*1)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
29
Auxiliary input3
User specified signal 3 (Signal specified by IECB3: ON) (*1)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
30
Auxiliary input4
User specified signal 4 (Signal specified by IECB4: ON) (*1)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
Not supported
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
160
160
Supervision Indications
32
Measurand supervision I
Zero sequence current supervision
33
Measurand supervision V
Zero sequence voltage supervision
Not supported
35
Phase sequence supervision
Negative sequence voltage supevision
36
Trip circuit supervision
Output circuit supervision
Not supported
37
I>>backup operation
38
VT fuse failure
VT failure
39
Teleprotection disturbed
CF(Communication system Fail) supervision
46
Group warning
Only alarming
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
47
Group alarm
Trip blocking and alarming
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Earth Fault Indications
48
Earth Fault L1
A phase earth fault (*2)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
49
Earth Fault L2
B phase earth fault (*2)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
50
Earth Fault L3
C phase earth fault (*2)
GI
1
1, 7, 9
160
51
Earth Fault Fwd
Earth fault forward (*2)
Not supported
52
Earth Fault Rev
Earth fault reverse (*2)
Not supported
 292 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Typ
e ID
COT
FUN
Fault Indications
64
Start/pick-up L1
A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7, 9
160
65
Start/pick-up L2
B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7, 9
160
66
Start/pick-up L3
C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7, 9
160
67
Start/pick-up N
Earth fault element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7, 9
160
68
General trip
BO status specified by IECGT: ON (*1)
--
2
1, 7
160
69
Trip L1
BO status specified by IECAT: ON (*1)
--
2
1, 7
160
70
Trip L2
BO status specified by IECBT: ON (*1)
--
2
1, 7
160
71
Trip L3
BO status specified by IECCT: ON (*1)
--
2
1, 7
160
72
Trip I>>(back-up)
Back up trip
Not supported
73
Fault location X In ohms
Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km selectable by
IECFL)
Not supported
74
Fault forward/line
Forward fault
Not supported
75
Fault reverse/Busbar
Reverse fault
Not supported
76
Teleprotection Signal
transmitted
Carrier signal sending
Not supported
77
Teleprotection Signal received
Carrier signal receiving
Not supported
78
Zone1
Zone 1 trip
Not supported
79
Zone2
Zone 2 trip
Not supported
80
Zone3
Zone 3 trip
Not supported
81
Zone4
Zone 4 trip
Not supported
82
Zone5
Zone 5 trip
Not supported
83
Zone6
Zone 6 trip
84
General Start/Pick-up
Any elements pick-up
GI
2
1, 7, 9
160
85
Breaker Failure
CBF trip or CBF retrip
--
2
1, 7
160
86
Trip measuring system L1
Not supported
87
Trip measuring system L2
Not supported
88
Trip measuring system L3
Not supported
89
Trip measuring system E
90
Trip I>
Inverse time OC trip (OC1 trip)
--
2
1, 7
160
91
Trip I>>
Definite time OC trip (OR logic of OC1 to OC3 trip)
--
2
1, 7
160
92
Trip IN>
Inverse time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 and SEF1 trip)
--
2
1, 7
160
Trip IN>>
Definite time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 to EF3 and
SEF1 to SEF3 trip)
--
2
1, 7
160
CB close command output
--
1
1, 7
160
93
Not supported
Not supported
Autoreclose indications
128
CB 'ON' by Autoreclose
129
CB 'ON' by long-time
Autoreclose
130
Autoreclose Blocked
Not supported
Autoreclose block
GI
Note (*1): Not available if the setting is "0".
(∗2): Not available when neither the EF nor SEF element is used.
 293 
1
1, 7, 9
160
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Type
ID
COT
FUN
IECI1 User specified 1
Signal specified by IECE1: ON (*1)
IECG1
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI2 User specified 2
Signal specified by IECE2: ON (*1)
IECG2
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI3 User specified 3
Signal specified by IECE3: ON (*1)
IECG3
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI4 User specified 4
Signal specified by IECE4: ON (*1)
IECG4
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI5 User specified 5
Signal specified by IECE5: ON (*1)
IECG5
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI6 User specified 6
Signal specified by IECE6: ON (*1)
IECG6
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI7 User specified 7
Signal specified by IECE7: ON (*1)
IECG7
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
IECI8 User specified 8
Signal specified by IECE8: ON (*1)
IECG8
(yes/no)
2
1, 7
160
Measurands(*3)
144
Measurand I
<meaurand I>
--
3.1
2, 7
160
145
Measurand I,V
Ib measurand <meaurand I>
--
3.2
2, 7
160
146
Measurand I,V,P,Q
Ib measurand <meaurand I>
--
3.3
2, 7
160
147
Measurand IN,VEN
Ie, Io measurand <meaurand I>
--
3.4
2, 7
160
148
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
P,Q,f
Ia, Ib, Ic measurand <meaurand II>
--
9
2, 7
160
Generic Function
240
Read Headings
Not supported
241
Read attributes of all entries of
a group
Not supported
243
Read directory of entry
Not supported
244
Real attribute of entry
Not supported
245
End of GGI
Not supported
249
Write entry w ith confirm
Not supported
250
Write entry w ith execute
Not supported
251
Write entry aborted
Not supported
Note (∗3): depends upon the relay model as follows:
Model
Model 400
Model 420
Model
Model 400
Model 420
Type ID=3.1
(INF=144)
IL2
Ib
Ib
Type ID=9
(INF=148)
IL1
Ia
Ia
Type ID=3.2
Type ID=3.3
Type ID=3.4
(INF=145)
(INF=146)
(INF=147)
IL2
VL1-VL2
IL2
VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q
IN
Ib
Ib
Ie
Ib
Ib
Ie
IL2
Ib
Ib
IL3
Ic
Ic
VL1
-
Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.
 294 
VL2
-
VL3
-
3-phase P 3-phase Q
-
VEN
-
f
-
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Description
INF
Contents
COM
Type
COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0
interrogation
0
Time synchronization
--
7
9
160
--
6
8
160
20
20
160
General commands
16
Auto-recloser on/off
17
Teleprotection on/off
ON/OFF
18
Protection on/off
(*4)
ON/OFF
20
20
160
19
LED reset
Reset indication of latched LEDs.
ON
20
20
160
23
Activate characteristic 1
Setting Group 1
ON
20
20
160
24
Activate characteristic 2
Setting Group 2
ON
20
20
160
25
Activate characteristic 3
Setting Group 3
Not supported
26
Activate characteristic 4
Setting Group 4
Not supported
Not supported
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240
groups
Read values or attributes of
241
all entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244
single entry
General Interrogation of
245
generic data
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
248
Write entry
Not supported
249
Write entry with confirmation
Not supported
250
Write entry with execution
Not supported
251
Write entry abort
Not supported
Note (∗4): When the relay is receiving the "Protection off" command, the " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Description
Contents
GRE110
supported
Comment
Basic application functions
Test mode
Yes
Blocking of monitor direction
Yes
Disturbance data
No
Generic services
No
Private data
No
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
value times
Measurand
Current L1
Ia
1,2 or 2,4
IECNFI setting
Current L2
Ib
1,2 or 2,4
IECNFI setting
Current L3
Ic
1,2 or 2,4
IECNFI setting
Voltage L1-E
Va
No
Voltage L2-E
Vb
No
Voltage L3-E
Vc
No
Active power P
P
No
Reactive power Q
Q
No
Frequency f
f
No
Voltage L1 - L2
Vab
No
 295 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
 296 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix O
PLC Default setting
 297 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INPUT
OUTPUT
10
CONSTANT 1
302 ARC READY
10
CONSTANT 1
303 ARC-S1 COND
10
CONSTANT 1
304 ARC-S2 COND
10
CONSTANT 1
305 ARC-S3 COND
10
CONSTANT 1
306 ARC-S4 COND
10
CONSTANT 1
307 ARC-S5 COND
 298 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix P
Inverse Time Characteristics
 299 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
TMS
1.5
1.
TMS
1.5
1
1.0
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.1
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Normal Inverse
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Very Inverse
 300 
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
10
100
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
1000
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
TMS
1.5
10
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Extremely Inverse
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Long Time Inverse
 301 
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
IEEE Inverse Curves (VI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
10
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
100
TMS
1.5
1
1.0
0.5
TM
1
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Moderately Inverse
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Very Inverse
 302 
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100
Operating Time (s)
10
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
Extremely Inverse
 303 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
US Inverse Curves (CO8)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
US Inverse Curves (CO2)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
10
100
10
1
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.0
0.2
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
100
1
CO8 Inverse
10
Current (Multiple of Setting)
CO2 Short Time Inverse
 304 
100
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix Q
IEC61850: Interoperability
 305 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. IEC61850 Documentation
IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) for GRE110
The GRE110 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the
following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes
GRE110
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD
Yes
Common Logical Node
Yes
LLN0
Yes
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions
PDIF
--PDIR
--PDIS
--PDOP
--PDUP
--PFRC
--PHAR
Yes
PHIZ
--PIOC
--PMRI
--PMSS
--POPE
--PPAM
--PSCH
--PSDE
--PTEF
--PTOC
Yes
PTOF
--PTOV
--PTRC
Yes
PTTR
Yes
PTUC
Yes
PTUV
--PUPF
--PTUF
--PVOC
--PVPH
--PZSU
--R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions
RDRE
--RADR
--RBDR
--RDRS
--RBRF
Yes
RDIR
--RFLO
--RPSB
--RREC
Yes
RSYN
--C: Logical Nodes for Control
CALH
--CCGR
--CILO
Yes
CPOW
--CSWI
Yes
 306 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references
GAPC
--GGIO
Yes
Nodes
GRE110
GGIO_GOOSE
--GSAL
--I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
IARC
--IHMI
--ITCI
--ITMI
--A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
ANCR
--ARCO
--ATCC
--AVCO
--M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
MDIF
--MHAI
--MHAN
--MMTR
--MMXN
--MMXU
Yes
MSQI
Yes
MSTA
--S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
SARC
--SIMG
--SIML
--SPDC
--X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
XCBR
Yes
XSWI
--T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
TCTR
--TVTR
--Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
YEFN
--YLTC
--YPSH
--YPTR
--Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
ZAXN
--ZBAT
--ZCAB
--ZCAP
--ZCON
--ZGEN
--ZGIL
--ZLIN
--ZMOT
--ZREA
--ZRRC
--ZSAR
--ZTCF
--ZTCR
---
 307 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3
Common data classes
Status information
SPS
DPS
INS
ACT
ACD
SEC
BCR
Measured information
CMV
SAV
WYE
DEL
SEQ
HMV
HWYE
HDEL
Controllable status information
SPC
DPC
INC
BSC
ISC
Controllable analogue information
APC
Status settings
SPG
ING
Analogue settings
ASG
CURVE
Description information
DPL
LPL
CSD
 308 
GRE110
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
--Yes
--Yes
------Yes
Yes
Yes
--------Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
---
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
LPHD class
Attribute Name
LNName
Data
PhyName
PhyHealth
OutOv
Proxy
InOv
NumPwrUp
WrmStr
WacTrg
PwrUp
PwrDn
PwrSupAlm
RsStat
Attr. Type
Explanation
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DPL
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
INS
INS
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
SPC
Physical device name plate
Physical device health
Output communications buffer overflow
Indicates if this LN is a proxy
Input communications buffer overflow
Number of Power ups
Number of Warm Starts
Number of watchdog device resets detected
Power Up detected
Power Down detected
External power supply alarm
Reset device statistics
Common Logical Node class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod
INC
Mode
Beh
INS
Behaviour
Health
INS
Health
NamPlt
LPL
Name plate
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc
SPS
Local operation
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
OpCntRs
INC
Operation counter resetable
OpCnt
INS
Operation counter
OpTmh
INS
Operation time
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node
Class
Loc
SPS
Local operation for complete logical device
OpTmh
INS
Operation time
Controls
Diag
SPC
Run Diagnostics
LEDRs
SPC
LED reset
 309 
T
M/O
GRE110
T
M
M
O
M
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
T
M/O
GRE110
M
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O
GRE110
T
M
T
O
O
Y
N
O
O
Y
Y
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PHAR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node
Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Settings
HarRst
ING
Number of harmonic restrained
PhStr
ASG
Start Value
PhStop
ASG
Stop Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
PTOC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node
Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
TmASt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
OpDITmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
TypRsCrv
ING
Type of Reset Curve
RsDITmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
DirMod
ING
Directional Mode
PTRC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node
Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Tr
ACT
Trip
Op
ACT
Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions)
Str
ACD
Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes
Settings
TrMod
ING
Trip Mode
TrPlsTmms
ING
Trip Pulse Time
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
 310 
T
M/O
GRE110
M
T
O
N
M
Y
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
N
N
N
M/O
GRE110
M
T
T
O
N
M
M
O
Y
Y
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
C
C
O
Y
N
N
O
O
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PTTR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured Values
Amp
MV
Current for thermal load model
Tmp
MV
Temperature for thermal load
TmpRl
MV
Relation between temperature and max. temperature
LodRsvAlm
MV
Load reserve to alarm
LodRsvTr
MV
Load reserve to trip
AgeRat
MV
Ageing rate
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
AlmThm
ACT
Thermal Alarm
TmTmpSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
TmASt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmTmpCrv
CURVE
Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement
TmACrv
CURVE
Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model
TmpMax
ASG
Maximum allowed temperature
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
ConsTms
ING
Time constant of the thermal model
AlmVal
ASG
Alarm Value
PTUC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start
Op
ACT
Operate
TmVSt
CSD
Active curve characteristic
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
Operating Curve Type
StrVal
ASG
Start Value
OpDlTmms
ING
Operate Delay Time
TmMult
ASG
Time Dial Multiplier
MinOpTmms
ING
Minimum Operate Time
MaxOpTmms
ING
Maximum Operate Time
TypRsCrv
ING
Type of Reset Curve
RsDlTmms
ING
Reset Delay Time
DirMod
ING
Directional Mode
 311 
T
T
T
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
M
O
O
O
Y
Y
Y
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
M
O
O
Y
Y
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RBRF class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Status Information
Str
ACD
Start, timer running
OpEx
ACT
Breaker failure trip (“external trip”)
OpIn
ACT
Operate, retrip (“internal trip”)
Setting
FailMod
ING
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both, other)
FailTmms
ING
Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip
SPlTrTmms
ING
Single Pole Retrip Time Delay
TPTrTmms
ING
Three Pole Retrip Time Delay
DetValA
ASG
Current Detector Value
ReTrMod
ING
Retrip Mode
T
T
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
O
C
C
Y
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
O
O
N
N
O
M
M
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
RREC class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Controls
BlkRec
SPC
Block Reclosing
ChkRec
SPC
Check Reclosing
Status Information
Auto
SPS
Automatic Operation (external switch status)
Op
ACT
Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR)
AutoRecSt
INS
Auto Reclosing Status
Setting
Rec1Tmms
ING
First Reclose Time
Rec2Tmms
ING
Second Reclose Time
Rec3Tmms
ING
Third Reclose Time
PlsTmms
ING
Close Pulse Time
RclTmms
ING
Reclaim Time
 312 
T
T
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CILO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
Status Information
EnaOpn
SPS
Enable Open
EnaCls
SPS
Enable Close
CSWI class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
Loc
SPS
Local operation
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Controls
Pos
DPC
Switch, general
PosA
DPC
Switch L1
PosB
DPC
Switch L2
PosC
DPC
Switch L3
OpOpn
ACT
Operation “Open Switch”
OpCls
ACT
Operation “Close Switch”
XCBR class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
OpCnt
INS
Operation counter
Controls
Pos
DPC
Switch position
BlkOpn
SPC
Block opening
BlkCls
SPC
Block closing
ChaMotEna
SPC
Charger motor enabled
Metered Values
SumSwARs
BCR
Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable
Status Information
CBOpCap
INS
Circuit breaker operating capability
POWCap
INS
Point On Wave switching capability
MaxOpCap
INS
Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged
 313 
T
M/O
GRE110
M
M
M
Y
Y
M/O
GRE110
M
O
O
N
N
T
T
M
O
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
N
N
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
O
M
N
N
Y
M
M
M
O
Y
Y
Y
N
O
N
M
O
O
Y
N
N
T
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GGIO class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Loc
SPS
Local operation
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Analogue input
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
Single point controllable status output
DPCSO
DPC
Double point controllable status output
ISCSO
INC
Integer status controllable status output
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Integer status input
Alm
SPS
General single alarm
Ind1
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind2
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind3
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind4
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind5
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind6
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind7
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind8
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind9
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind10
SPS
General indication (binary input)
:
:
:
Ind32
SPS
General indication (binary input)
 314 
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
O
N
O
O
O
N
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
Y
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GGIO (for GOOSE) class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Loc
SPS
Local operation
OpCntRs
INC
Resetable operation counter
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Analogue input
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
Single point controllable status output
DPCSO
DPC
Double point controllable status output
ISCSO
INC
Integer status controllable status output
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Integer status input
Alm
SPS
General single alarm
Ind1
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind2
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind3
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind4
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind5
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind6
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind7
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind8
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind9
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind10
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind11
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind12
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind13
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind14
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind15
SPS
General indication (binary input)
Ind16
SPS
General indication (binary input)
 315 
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
O
N
O
O
O
N
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MMXU class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
Measured values
TotW
MV
Total Active Power (Total P)
TotVAr
MV
Total Reactive Power (Total Q)
TotVA
MV
Total Apparent Power (Total S)
TotPF
MV
Average Power factor (Total PF)
Hz
MV
Frequency
PPV
DEL
Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …)
PhV
WYE
Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …)
A
WYE
Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
W
WYE
Phase active power (P)
VAr
WYE
Phase reactive power (Q)
VA
WYE
Phase apparent power (S)
PF
WYE
Phase power factor
Z
WYE
Phase Impedance
MSQI class
Attribute Name
Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health (external sensor)
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
Measured values
SeqA
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current
SeqV
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage
DQ0Seq
SEQ
DQ0 Sequence
ImbA
WYE
Imbalance current
ImbNgA
MV
Imbalance negative sequence current
ImbNgV
MV
Imbalance negative sequence voltage
ImbPPV
DEL
Imbalance phase-phase voltage
ImbV
WYE
Imbalance voltage
ImbZroA
MV
Imbalance zero sequence current
ImbZroV
MV
Imbalance zero sequence voltage
MaxImbA
MV
Maximum imbalance current
MaxImbPPV
MV
Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage
MaxImbV
MV
Maximum imbalance voltage
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
 316 
T
T
M/O
GRE110
M
O
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
M/O
GRE110
M
O
O
N
N
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SPS class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
q
Quality
ST
qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
BOOLEAN
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRE110
TRUE | FALSE
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRE110
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
TRUE | FALSE
Text
INS class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal
INT32
ST
dchg
q
Quality
ST
qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
Substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
INT32
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
 317 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ACT class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
neut
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
q
Quality
ST
qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
configuration, description and extension
operTm
TimeStamp
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
ACD class
Attribute
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
general
dirGeneral
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRE110
M
O
O
O
O
M
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRE110
M
M
Y
Y
GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (1)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (2)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (3)
GC_2 (4)
GC_2 (4)
M
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
BOOLEAN
ENUMERATED
phsA
BOOLEAN
dirPhsA
ENUMERATED
phsB
BOOLEAN
dirPhsB
ENUMERATED
phsC
BOOLEAN
dirPhsC
ENUMERATED
neut
BOOLEAN
dirNeut
ENUMERATED
q
Quality
t
TimeStamp
configuration, description and extension
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
ST
ST
dchg
dchg
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
dchg
dchg
dchg
dchg
dchg
dchg
dchg
dchg
qchg
DC
DC
EX
EX
EX
unknown | forward | backward
| both
unknown | forward | backward
unknown | forward | backward
unknown | forward | backward
unknown | forward | backward
Text
 318 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CMV class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal
Vector
MX
cVal
Vector
MX
dchg
range
ENUMERATED
MX
dchg
normal | high | low | high-high |
low-low |…
q
Quality
MX
qchg
t
TimeStamp
MX
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
Vector
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
db
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
zeroDb
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
rangeC
RangeConfig
CF
magSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
angSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
V | A | other …
smpRate
INT32U
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
WYE class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA
CMV
phsB
CMV
phsC
CMV
neut
CMV
net
CMV
res
CMV
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab |
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
 319 
M/O/C
GRE110
O
M
O
N
Y
N
M
M
Y
Y
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
O
O
O
GC_CON
AC_SCAV
AC_SCAV
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRE110
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
O
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SEQ class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
c1
CMV
c2
CMV
c3
CMV
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT
ENUMERATED
MX
configuration, description and extension
phsRef
ENUMERATED
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRE110
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero
M
Y
A| B | C| …
Text
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
 320 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SPC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
BOOLEAN
CO
off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator_RO
CO,
ST
ctlNum
INT8U_RO
CO,
0..255
ST
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Cancel
Oper
Cancel
CO
CO
stVal
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
FALSE | TRUE
q
Quality
ST
qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
stSeld
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
Substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
BOOLEAN
SV
FALSE | TRUE
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig
PulseConfig
CF
CtlModel
CtlModels
CF
sboTimeout
INT32U
CF
sboClass
SboClasses
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.2 (see IEC 61850-8-1)
 321 
M/O/C
GRE110
AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
N
N
N
AC_CO_O
N
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
AC_CO_SBOW_
E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_CO_O
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
AC_CO_O
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DPC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
BOOLEAN
CO
off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator
CO,
ST
ctlNum
INT8U
CO,
0..255
ST
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Cancel
Oper
Cancel
CO
CO
stVal
CODED ENUM
ST
dchg
q
t
stSeld
Substitution
subEna
subVal
Quality
TimeStamp
BOOLEAN
ST
ST
ST
qchg
BOOLEAN
CODED ENUM
SV
SV
dchg
M/O/C
GRE110
AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
N
N
N
AC_CO_O
N
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
AC_CO_SBOW_
E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
intermediate-state | off | on | M
bad-state
M
M
AC_CO_O
intermediate-state | off | on |
bad-state
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig
PulseConfig
CF
ctlModel
CtlModels
CF
sboTimeout
INT32U
CF
sboClass
SboClasses
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.3 (see IEC 61850-8-1)
 322 
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
AC_CO_O
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
INT32
CO
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator
CO,
ST
ctlNum
INT8U
CO,
0..255
ST
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Cancel
Oper
Cancel
CO
CO
stVal
INT32
ST
dchg
Q
Quality
ST
qchg
T
TimeStamp
ST
stSeld
BOOLEAN
ST
dchg
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
INT32
SV
FALSE | TRUE
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
CtlModel
CtlModels
CF
sboTimeout
INT32U
CF
sboClass
SboClasses
CF
minVal
INT32
CF
maxVal
INT32
CF
stepSize
INT32U
CF
1 … (maxVal – minVal)
D
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.4 (see IEC 61850-8-1)
 323 
M/O/C
GRE110
AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
N
N
N
AC_CO_O
N
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
AC_CO_SBOW_
E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N
_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
M
M
M
AC_CO_O
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ING class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setVal
INT32
SP
setVal
INT32
SG, SE
configuration, description and extension
minVal
INT32
CF
maxVal
INT32
CF
stepSize
INT32U
CF
1 … (maxVal – minVal)
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 39 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
ASG class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setMag
AnalogueValue
SP
setMag
AnalogueValue
SG, SE
configuration, description and extension
units
Unit
CF
sVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
minVal
AnalogueValue
CF
maxVal
AnalogueValue
CF
stepSize
AnalogueValue
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 42 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
Value/Value Range
see Annex A
1 … (maxVal – minVal)
Text
 324 
M/O/C
GRE110
AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M
Y
N
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRE110
AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M
Y
N
O
AC_SCAV
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
hwRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
serNum
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
model
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
location
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 45 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
LPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
configRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
shall be included in LLN0 only;
ldNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
M/O/C
GRE110
M
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRE110
M
M
M
O
AC_LN0_M
AC_LN0_EX
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
AC_DLD_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
As defined in Table 45 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
EX
EX
EX
EX
 325 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Logical nodes for GRE110
Logical Nodes
Relay Element
PHAR
PHAR1
ICD (2f)
PTOC
PTOC11
OC1
PTOC12
OC2
PTOC13
OC3
PTOC14
OC4
PTOC21
EF1
PTOC22
EF2
PTOC23
EF3
PTOC24
EF4
PTOC31
SEF1
PTOC32
SEF2
PTOC33
SEF3
PTOC34
SEF4
PTOC41
NPS1
PTOC42
NPS2
PTOC5
BC
PTRC
PTRC1
General Trip
PTTR
PTTR1
THM-A, THM-T
PTUC
PTUC1
UC1
PTUC2
UC2
RBRF
RBRF1
CBF trip / CBF retrip
RREC
RREC1
Auto reclose
 326 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GRE series IED
・NTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the IEC
61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series.
Together with the MICS, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC
61850-10.
・CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT
Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance
statement”.
 327 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Client-server roles
B11
Server side (of TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12
Client side of (TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21
SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used
B22
SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used
B23
SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used
B24
SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31
Publisher side
B32
Subscriber side
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side
If Server side (B11) supported
M1
Logical device
M2
Logical node
M3
Data
M4
Data set
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
Reporting
M7
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
M8
Unbuffered report control
M8-1
sequence-number
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
M8-4
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
M8-8
GI
Logging
M9
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M11
Control
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE
M12-1
entryID
M12-2
DataRefInc
M13
GSSE
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
M17
File Transfer
Server
S1
GetServerDirectory
Client/
subscriber
Server/
publisher
IED
-
c1
Y
c1
-
-
Y
N
N
O
O
-
Y
Y
O
O
-
N
N
c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O
c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
M
O
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
O
O
Y
O
O
N
O
O
M
O
O
O
M
O
N
N
Y
N
M
Y
 328 
Remarks
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Application association
S2
Associate
S3
Abort
S4
Release
Logical device
S5
GetLogicalDeviceDirectory
Logical node
S6
GetLogicalNodeDirectory
S7
GetAllDataValues
Data
S8
GetDataValues
S9
SetDataValues
S10
GetDataDirectory
S11
GetDataDefinition
Data set
S12
GetDataSetValues
S13
SetDataSetValues
S14
CreateDataSet
S15
DeleteDataSet
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
Substitution
S17
SetDataValues
Setting group control
S18
SelectActiveSG
S19
SelectEditSG
S20
SetSGValues
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
S22
GetSGValues
S23
GetSGCBValues
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change (dchg)
S24-2
quality-change (qchg)
S24-3
data-update (dupd)
S25
GetBRCBValues
S26
SetBRCBValues
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27
Report
S27-1
data-change (dchg)
S27-2
quality-change (qchg)
S27-3
data-update (dupd)
S28
GetURCBValues
S29
SetURCBValues
Logging
Log control block
S30
GetLCBValues
S31
SetLCBValues
Log
S32
QueryLogByTime
S33
QueryLogAfter
S34
GetLogStatusValues
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
S36
GetGoReference
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
S38
GetGoCBValues
S39
SetGoCBValues
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40
SendGSSEMessage
S41
GetGsReference
S42
GetGSSEDataOffset
S43
GetGsCBValues
S44
SetGsCBValues
M
M
M
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
M
M
Y
M
O
M
M
Y
Y
M
O
O
O
M
O
M
M
Y
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
M
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
Y
M
M
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
M
O
M
M
N
N
c7
c7
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
c8
O
O
O
O
c8
c9
c9
O
O
Y
N
N
Y
Y
c8
O
O
O
O
c8
c9
c9
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
 329 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45
SendMSVMessage
S46
GetMSVCBValues
S47
SetMSVCBValues
Unicast SVC
S48
SendUSVMessage
S49
GetUSVCBValues
S50
SetUSVCBValues
Control
S51
Select
S52
SelectWithValue
S53
Cancel
S54
Operate
S55
CommandTermination
S56
TimeActivatedOperate
File Transfer
S57
GetFile
S58
SetFile
S59
DeleteFile
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
Time
T1
Time resolution of internal clock
T2
Time accuracy of internal clock
T3
Supported TimeStamp resolution
c10
O
O
c10
O
O
N
N
N
c10
O
O
c10
O
O
N
N
N
M
M
O
M
M
O
O
O
O
M
O
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
O
O
O
O
M
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
100ms
100ms
100ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has
been declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
 330 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PICS for A-Profile support
A-Profile
shortcut
A1
A2
Profile Description
Client
F/S
c1
c2
Server
F/S
c1
c2
IED
Remarks
Client/server A-Profile
Y
GOOSE/GSE
Y
management A-Profile
A3
GSSE A-Profile
c3
c3
N
A4
TimeSync A-Profile
c4
c4
Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support
A-Profile
Profile Description
Client
Server
shortcut
F/S
F/S
T1
TCP/IP T-Profile
c1
c1
T2
OSI T-Profile
c2
c2
T3
GOOSE/GSE T-Profile
c3
c3
T4
GSSE T-Profile
c4
c4
T5
TimeSync T-Profile
o
o
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
 331 
IED
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Remarks
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Protcol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing (PIXIT) for IEC61850 interface in GRE series IED
・Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the
IEC 61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series version
upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to
IEC 61850-10.
・Contents of this document
Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
PIXIT for Association model
ID
As1
As2
Description
Maximum number of clients that can
set-up an association simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value
As3
Lost connection detection time
As4
As5
Is authentication supported
What association parameters are
necessary for successful association
As6
If association parameters are
necessary for association, describe the
correct values e.g.
What is the maximum and minimum
MMS PDU size
As7
As8
What is the maximum startup time
after a power supply interrupt
Value / Clarification
6
7200 seconds at the default setting.
Setting range is from 1s to 43200s.
After the KEEPALIVE is no response,
retrying 9 times every “X” seconds until
declaring that the association has been lost.
“X” is one tenth of TCP_KEEPALIVE value.
Ex. The lost connection detection time is 18s
(9 times x 2 s), when TCP_KEEPALIVE
value is 20 s.
N
Transport selector
N
Session selector
N
Presentation selector N
AP Title
N
AE Qualifier
N
N.A.
Max MMS PDU size
8172
Min MMS PDU size
Not limited. It
depends on a request.
180 seconds
Check the start-up signal
(No.227)
 332 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Server model
ID
Sr1
Description
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits
are supported (can be set by server)
Sr2
Which status value (ST) quality bits are
supported (can be set by server)
Sr3
What is the maximum number of data
values in one GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data
values in one SetDataValues request
Which Mode / Behavior values are
supported
Sr4
Sr5
Value / Clarification
Validity:
Y
Good,
Y
Invalid,
N
Reserved,
Y
Questionable
N
Overflow
Y
OutofRange
N
BadReference
N
Oscillatory
Y
Failure
N
OldData
N
Inconsistent
N
Inaccurate (Only Hz)
Source:
N
Process
N
Substituted
Y
Test
N
OperatorBlocked
Validity:
Y
Good,
Y
Invalid,
N
Reserved,
Y
Questionable
N
BadReference
N
Oscillatory
Y
Failure
N
OldData
N
Inconsistent
N
Inaccurate
Source:
N
Process
N
Substituted
Y
Test
N
OperatorBlocked
Not restricted; depend on the max. MAX
PDU size given in previous page.
N.A.
 333 
On
Blocked
Test
Test/Blocked
Off
Y
N
Y
N
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Data set model
ID
Ds1
Ds2
Ds3
Description
Value / Clarification
What is the maximum number of data
Not limited by an internal configuration
elements in one data set (compare ICD parameter.
setting)
This IED does not have CreateDataSet
service. But any DataSet can be defined by
using engineering tool. The maximum number
depends on the memory size of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be
Not limited by an internal configuration
created by one or more clients
parameter.
(this number includes predefined
datasets)
The maximum number depends on the
memory size of IED.
How many non-persistent data sets
N.A.
can be created by one or more clients
PIXIT for Substitution model
ID
Sb1
Description
Are substituted
volatile memory?
values
stored
in
Value / Clarification
N.A.
PIXIT for Setting group control model
ID
Sg1
Sg2
Sg3
Sg4
Sg5
Description
Value / Clarification
What is the number of supported
2
setting groups for each logical device
(compare NumSG in the SGCB)
What is the effect of when and how the
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
non-volatile storage is updated
supported according to PICS.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4)
After changing setting group number with
LCD panel, you can see new setting group
with GetSGCBValue service.
Can multiple clients edit the same
N.A.
setting group
What happens if the association is lost
N.A.
while editing a setting group
Is EditSG value 0 allowed?
N.A.
 334 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Reporting model
ID
Rp1
Description
The supported trigger conditions are
(compare PICS)
Rp2
The supported optional fields are
Rp3
Rp4
Rp5
Rp6
Rp7
Rp8
Rp9
Rp10
Rp11
Can the server send segmented
reports
Mechanism on second internal data
change notification of the same analogue
data value within buffer period
(Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach
(compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1)
What is the format of EntryID
What is the buffer size for each BRCB
or how many reports can be buffered
Pre-configured RCB attributes that
cannot be changed online when RptEna
= FALSE
(see also the ICD report settings)
May the reported data set contain:
- structured data objects?
- data attributes?
What is the scan cycle for binary
events?
Is this fixed, configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a
RCB to a specific client in the SCL
Value / Clarification
integrity
data change
quality change
data update
general interrogation
sequence-number
report-time-stamp
reason-for-inclusion
data-set-name
data-reference
buffer-overflow
entryID
conf-rev
segmentation
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Send report immediately
Each URCB is visible to all clients
It is made up of the circular buffer counter
at the time the event was entered.
For example, LLN0$ST$Health can be
stored 40 events.
N.A.
 335 
Y
Y
GRE110: More than 1500 milliseconds
Fixed
N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Logging model
ID
Lg1
Lg2
Lg3
Lg4
Description
What is the default value of LogEna
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1,
the default value should be FALSE)
What is the format of EntryID
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.1)
If there are multiple Log Control
Blocks that specify the Journaling of the
same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps
and the Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)
Pre-configured LCB attributes that
cannot be changed online
PIXIT for Generic substation events model
ID
Description
Go1
What elements of a subscribed
GOOSE header are checked to decide
the message is valid and the allData
values are accepted? If yes, describe
the conditions.
Note: the VLAN tag may be
removed by a ethernet switch and
should not be checked
Go2
Go3
Go4
Go5
Value / Clarification
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Value / Clarification
N
source MAC address
Y
destination MAC address
= as configured
Y
Ethertype = 0x88B8
Y
APPID = as configured and 0
Y
gocbRef = as configured
N
timeAllowedtoLive
N
datSet
Y
goID = as configured
N
t
N
stNum
Y
sqNum
Y
test
N
confRev
Y
ndsCom
N
numDatSetEntries
N
Can the test flag in the published
GOOSE be turned on / off
What is the behavior when the
If the configuration is incorrect, the GOOSE
GOOSE publish configuration is isn’t published.
incorrect
When is a subscribed GOOSE
Message does not arrive prior to TAL.
marked as lost?
(TAL = time allowed to live value
from the last received GOOSE
message)
What is the behavior when one or
[stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
more subscribed GOOSE messages
No fail will be detected.
isn’t
received
or
syntactically
incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
(=1100 0000 1000 0). After receiving message with
correct sqNum order, the quality information is
set to GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
 336 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ID
Go6
Go7
Go8
Go9
Go10
Go11
Go12
Go13
Go14
Go15
Go16
Description
What is the behavior when a
subscribed GOOSE message is
out-of-order
What is the behavior when a
subscribed GOOSE message is
duplicated
Does the device subscribe to
GOOSE messages with/without the
VLAN tag?
May the GOOSE data set contain:
- structured data objects (FCD)?
- timestamp data attributes?
Note: data attributes (FCDA) is
mandatory
Published FCD supported common
data classes / data types are
Subscribed
FCD
supported
common data classes / data types are
What is the slow retransmission
time?
Is it fixed or configurable?
What is the minimum supported
retransmission time?
What is the maximum supported
retransmission time?
Is it fixed or configurable?
Can the Goose publish be turned
on
/
off
by
using
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)
What is the fast retransmission
scheme?
Is it fixed or configurable?
What is the behavior when one
subscribed GOOSE message exceeds
the previous time Allowed to Live
(TAL)
Value / Clarification
Refer to Go5.
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
(=1100 0000 1000 0).
Y, with the VLAN tag
Y, without the VLAN tag
Subscribed
Y
N
Published
N
N
60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds
Fixed.
<minTime>
300 milliseconds
<maxTime>
Fixed
Y
300 milliseconds with TAL = 600 milliseconds
Fixed.
When expected time (TAL) spends without
GOOSE message, GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become QUESTIONABLE
(=1100 0000 0000 0).
After that, when IED receive time exceeded
GOOSE with SqNum=0, GOOSE subscribe
quality information will become GOOD (=0000
0000 0000 0).
When IED receive time exceeded GOOSE with
SqNum!=0, GOOSE subscribe quality information
will
become
QUESTIONABLE
|
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)
When GOOSE with TAL=0 is received, GOOSE
subscribe quality information will become
QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100
0000 1000 0)
Payload data consistency is not used to
determine if TAL is exceeded.
 337 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ID
Go17
Description
What is the behavior when a
subscribed GOOSE message is “test”
Go18
What is the behavior when a
subscribed GOOSE message is
“ndsCom”
Go19
Acceptable data type
Value / Clarification
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100 0000
0001 0).
Payload data is not received.
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
(=1100 0000 0100 0).
Payload data is not received.
Boolean
BitSring
Integer
Unsigned Integer
But each data size shall be less than 32 bits.
Go20
Other types (TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will
be ignored by IED.
When GOOSE subscribe quality information is
GOOD, the IED receives the payload data.
Dataset structure of a subscribed
This is not checked. Two GOOSEs, which have
GOOSE
same header (e.g.GoID) and different dataset
structure, are treated as the same GOOSEs.
And if received GOOSEs have same header, the
fixed position of the GOOSE dataset is read. E.g.
the 1st element of the dataset is set to read, it
keeps reading the 1st element even if the dataset
structure is different.
Go21
Go22
Note:
Subscribed payload data structure is checked to
determine if IED accepts/discards the data;
however the TAL timeout is reset even when such
data is discarded.
What is the behavior when the
The device starts sending GOOSE from
device starts up?
stNum=1 and sqNum=1.
Is it supported to set the “ndsCom”
N
as TRUE?
TAL = Time Allowed to Live
 338 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Control model
ID
Ct1
Description
What control models are supported
(compare PICS)
Ct2
Is
the
control
model
fixed,
configurable and/or online changeable?
Is Time activated operate supported
Is “operate-many” supported
Will the DUT activate the control
output when the test attribute is set in
the SelectWithValue and/or Operate
request (when N test procedure Ctl2 is
applicable)
Ct3
Ct4
Ct5
Ct6
Ct7
Ct8
Ct9
Ct10
What are the conditions for the time
(T) attribute in the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate request?
Is pulse configuration supported
What is the behavior of the DUT when
the check conditions are set?
Is this behavior fixed, configurable,
online changeable?
Value / Clarification
Y
status-only
Y
direct-with-normal-security
Y
sbo-with-normal-security
N
direct-with-enhanced-security
N
sbo-with-enhanced-security
Configurable
(need to restart after configuration)
N
N
N
FALSE
TRUE
Test flag
IED
Mode
Normal
Accepted
Rejected
Test
Rejected
Accepted
Accepted:
The control request is accepted by IED.
Rejected:
The control request is rejected by IED with
AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”.
N.A.
N
Only interlock bit is checked.
This behavior is fixed.
Note:
When interlock is an enable, the control
request is rejected by IED with AddCause
“Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
What additional cause diagnosis are
Y Not-supported
supported?
N Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
N Invalid-position
N Position-reached
N Parameter-change-in-execution
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
N Blocked-by-synchrocheck
N Command-already-in-execution
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
N Abortion-by-cancel
N Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-non-selected
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond
Set orCat with unsupported value.
with SelectWithValue request?
 339 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ID
Ct11
Ct12
Ct13
Ct14
Description
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond
with Select request?
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond
with Operate request?
Which
origin
categories
are
supported?
What happens if the orCat is not
supported?
Ct15
Does
the
IED
accept
a
SelectWithValue/Operate with the same
ctlVal as the current status value?
Ct16
Does the IED accept a select/operate
on the same control object from 2
different clients at the same time?
Does
the
IED
accept
a
Select/SelectWithValue from the same
client when the control object is already
selected (tissue 334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation
performed during the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate step?
Can a control operation be blocked by
Mod=Off or Blocked
Does the IED support local / remote
operation?
Does
the
IED
send
an
InformationReport with LastApplError
as part of the Operate response- for
control with normal security?
Ct17
Ct18
Ct19
Ct20
Ct21
Value / Clarification
N.A.
DOns, SBOns:
Set orCat with unsupported value.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
N
DOns, SBOns:
“test-not-ok” IED respond
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
DOns, SBOns: N
The control request is rejected by IED with
AddCause “Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
DOns,: Y
SBOns: N
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
SBOns: N
SBOes: N.A.
 340 
N.A.
Y
Y
DOns: N
SBOns: Y
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION model
ID
Tm1
Tm2
Tm3
Tm4
Tm5
Tm6
Tm7
Description
What quality bits are supported
(may be set by the IED)
Value / Clarification
N LeapSecondsKnown
N ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized
Describe the behavior when the time
The quality attribute “ClockNotSynchronized”
synchronization signal/messages are will be set to TRUE.
lost
When is the time quality bit "Clock
N.A.
failure" set?
When is the time quality bit "Clock
It
depends
on
the
condition
of
not synchronised” set?
synchronization. Typically 120 seconds
Is the timestamp of a binary event
N
adjusted to the configured scan cycle?
Does the device support time zone
Y
and daylight saving?
Support time zone only.
Which attibutes of the SNTP
Y
Leap indicator not equal to 3?
response packet are validated?
N
Mode is equal to SERVER
N
OriginateTimestamp is equal
to
value sent by the SNTP client as
Transmit Timestamp
Y
RX/TX
timestamp
fields
are
checked for reasonableness
Y
SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N
other (describe)
 341 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for FILE TRANSFER model
ID
Ft1
Description
What is structure
directories?
of
files
and
Value / Clarification
N.A.
Where are the COMTRADE files
stored?
Ft2
Ft3
Ft4
Ft5
Ft6
Ft7
Ft8
Are comtrade files zipped and what
files are included in each zip file?
Directory names are separated from
the file name by
The maximum file name size including
path (recommended 64 chars)
Are directory/file name case sensitive?
Maximum file size
Is the requested file path included in
the file name of the MMS fileDirectory
respond?
Is the wild char supported MMS
fileDirectory request?
Is it allowed that 2 client get a file at
the same time?
 342 
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement (TICS) of the IEC61850 communication interface GRE series IED
・Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series
version upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
・Mandatory Intop Tissues
During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
•
green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
•
Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.
Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
 343 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Part
8-1
7-4
7-3
7-2
Tissue
Nr
Description
Implemented
Y/n.a.
116
165
183
None
28
54
55
60
63
65
219
270
30
31
32
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
50
51
52
53
151
166
185
189
190
191
GetNameList with empty response?
Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues
GetNameList error handling
Y
Y
Y
Definition of APC
Point def xVal, not cVal
Ineut = Ires ?
Services missing in tables
mag in CDC CMV
Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option
operTm in ACT
WYE and DEL rms values
control parameter T
Typo
Typo in syntax
Typo Syntax Control time
Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing
Syntax GOOSE "T" type
Add DstAddr to GoCB
GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID”
GsCB “AppID” to “GsID”
SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp"
Control "T" semantic
AddCause - Object not sel
Missing AddCauses (neg range)
Synchro check cancel
"." in LD Name?
BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453)
LNName start with number?
ARRAY [0..num] missing
Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum
Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV
Name constraint for control blocks etc.
DataRef attribute in Log
Logging - Integrity periode
SV Format
BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453)
BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of
#453)
New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit
integer)
Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453)
EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453)
Syntax
tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted
SIUnit enumeration for W
Base type for bitstring usage
DAI/SDI elements syntax
Ordering of enum differs from 7-3
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Y
Y
Y
n.a.
Y
n.a
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Y
Y
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Y
n.a.
Y
Y
Y
n.a.
Y
n.a.
Y
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
Y
Y
234
Part 6
NOTE:
275
278
1
5
8
10
17
169
n.a.
Y
Y
Y
Y
n.a.
Y
Y
Y
Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other technical tissues in the table are
mandatory if applicable.
 344 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Optional IntOp Tissues
After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2 the following IntOp
tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues.
Part
Tissue Nr
Description
8-1
8-1
7-2
7-2
6
6
246
545
333
453
245
529
Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError
Skip file directories with no files
Enabling of an incomplete GoCB
Combination of all reporting and logging tissues
Attribute RptId in SCL
Replace sev - Unknown by unknown
Implemented
Y/N/n.a.
Y
n.a
n.a.
N
N
n.a.
Other Implemented Tissues
Part
Tissue Nr
8-1
109
118
121
344
76
38
3
6
7
11
15
7-4
7-2
6
Description
GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses
File directory
GOOSE subscriber behavior
TimeOfEntry misspelled
CBOpCap and SwOpCap
Syntax "AppID" or "GoID"
Missing ENUMs
ReportControl/OptFields
Duplication of attributes
Schema for IP Addr?
bufOvfl in Schema?
 345 
Implemented
Y/N/n.a.
Y
n.a.
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the IEC 61850 communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control by the Select Before Operate or Direct Operate (CB Open / CB Close)
- Change of interlock position (BlkOpn or BlkCls)
- Trip LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with ICE 61850 communication is require the following three steps.
- get Logical nodes by using IEC 61850 data setting tools (such as TAMARACK tool).
- change the control logical node (XCBR, CILO or CSWI).
When CB is remote controlled from PC, showing below the control reaction depending on the CB Status.
CB Status
Response
BI-a
(CB_OPC_BI)
BI-b
(CB_CLC_BI)
CB LED
lighting
0
0
CLOSE
1
0
CLOSE
1
1
CLOSE
0
1
OPEN
CB Open Operation
・Unlock: operate
・Lock※: not operate
・Unlock: operate
・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate
・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate
・Lock: not operate
CB Close Operation
・Unlock: not operate
・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate
・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate
・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: operate
・Lock: not operate
※Lock condition is as follows.
•
Setting the Inter lock in the Control screen of front panel LCD (see chapter 4.2.6.11) and remote
setting the CB open lock and CB close lock from PC.
•
Occurring Relay Trip.
•
When Local/Remote status is “Local” (see chapter 4.2.7.1).
•
When Control status is “Disable” (see chapter 4.2.6.11).
 346 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix R
Ordering
 347 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Ordering
Overcurrent Relay
GRE110
Type:
Overcurrent Protection Relay
Model:
- Model 400: Three phase and earth fault
2 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
- Model 420: Three phase and sensitive earth fault
2 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
Rating:
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc
Standard and language:
IEC (English)
ANSI (English)
Chinese
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
-Optional Communication for Model 402 and 422100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
GRE110
 348 
400
401
402
420
421
422
1
2
A
0
1
2
10
11
A0
C0
A
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Version-up Records
Version
Date
No.
0.0
May. 12, 2010
1.0
Oct. 20, 2010
Revised Section
Contents
-2.1
2.5
Appendix M
2.1
2.2.5
Appendix K
Appendix M
Appendix O
1
2.13
3.1
3.2.1
3.2.4
4.2
4.5
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Appendix G
Appendix K
Appendix N
First issue
Modified the description.
Added the Section “2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection”.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the Section “2.2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection”.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Added ‘2.13 Auto reclose’.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Added ‘3.2.4 PLC’.
Modified the description.
Added ‘4.5 IEC60870-5-103 interface’.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Added ‘Appendix N IEC60870-5-103’.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the diagrams.
Modified the description.
Modified the Ordering Cords.
2.0
3.0
Nov. 13, 2010
Sep. 12, 2011
4.0
May. 15, 2012
4.1
May. 25, 2012
2.13
3.2.4
4.2.6
Appendix M
4.2
Jan. 28, 2013
Appendix G
Appendix K
Appendix P
5.0
May. 15, 2013
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.4.3
3.6
4.1
4.2.6
4.2.6.4
4.2.6.6
4.6
5
6.7.2
6.7.3
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix P
Modified the description.
Added the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Added the description.
Added the description for model 402A and 422A.
Modified the description (change setting items).
Modified the Addr./Param screen for IEC61850.
Added the description for IEC61850.
Modified the Status screen. Added the description.
Added the description.
Added the description for model 402A and 422A.
Modified the table 6.7.1.
Modified the description.
Added the signal list for IEC61850.
Added the Event Record Items for IEC61850.
Added the IEC61850 Interoperability.
 349 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Version
Date
No.
5.1
Jun. 24, 2013
Revised Section
Contents
2.2.5, 2.2.6
3.2.2, 3.3.3
3.4.3, 3.6
4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2
4.6
5.2.2
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
Modified the description.
5.2
Dec.13, 2013
2
2.3
3
3.2.2
3.2.3
4
5
Appendix B
Appendix F
Appendix G
Appendix H
Appendix K
Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Added Dirrectional sensitive Earth fault protection.
Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Modified the diagram..
Modified the description.
Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Added ZP signal.
Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Added the GRE110-821A model
Added ZP setting.
Added ZP setting.
5.3
Jun. 24, 2014
4.3
5.6
Appendix H
Appendix M
Appendix O
Modified the description.
Added the Optional model.
Modified the description.
Modified the MODBUS address.
Added the PLC default setting
 350 